You are on page 1of 167

SURPASS hiT 7300

4.1
Technical Description (TED)
A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618


2 A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
Technical Description (TED)
The information in this document is subject to change without notice and describes only the
product defined in the introduction of this documentation. This documentation is intended for the
use of Nokia Siemens Networks customers only for the purposes of the agreement under which
the document is submitted, and no part of it may be used, reproduced, modified or transmitted
in any form or means without the prior written permission of Nokia Siemens Networks. The
documentation has been prepared to be used by professional and properly trained personnel,
and the customer assumes full responsibility when using it. Nokia Siemens Networks welcomes
customer comments as part of the process of continuous development and improvement of the
documentation.
The information or statements given in this documentation concerning the suitability, capacity,
or performance of the mentioned hardware or software products are given "as is" and all liability
arising in connection with such hardware or software products shall be defined conclusively and
finally in a separate agreement between Nokia Siemens Networks and the customer. However,
Nokia Siemens Networks has made all reasonable efforts to ensure that the instructions
contained in the document are adequate and free of material errors and omissions. Nokia
Siemens Networks will, if deemed necessary by Nokia Siemens Networks, explain issues which
may not be covered by the document.
Nokia Siemens Networks will correct errors in this documentation as soon as possible. IN NO
EVENT WILL NOKIA SIEMENS NETWORKS BE LIABLE FOR ERRORS IN THIS DOCUMEN-
TATION OR FOR ANY DAMAGES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO SPECIAL, DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL OR ANY LOSSES, SUCH AS BUT NOT
LIMITED TO LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, BUSINESS
OPPORTUNITY OR DATA,THAT MAY ARISE FROM THE USE OF THIS DOCUMENT OR
THE INFORMATION IN IT.
This documentation and the product it describes are considered protected by copyrights and
other intellectual property rights according to the applicable laws.
The wave logo is a trademark of Nokia Siemens Networks Oy. Nokia is a registered trademark
of Nokia Corporation. Siemens is a registered trademark of Siemens AG.
Other product names mentioned in this document may be trademarks of their respective
owners, and they are mentioned for identification purposes only.
Copyright Nokia Siemens Networks 2007. All rights reserved.
f Important Notice on Product Safety
Elevated voltages are inevitably present at specific points in this electrical equipment.
Some of the parts may also have elevated operating temperatures.
Non-observance of these conditions and the safety instructions can result in personal
injury or in property damage.
Therefore, only trained and qualified personnel may install and maintain the system.
The system complies with the standard EN 60950 / IEC 60950. All equipment connected
has to comply with the applicable safety standards.
The same text in German:
Wichtiger Hinweis zur Produktsicherheit
In elektrischen Anlagen stehen zwangslufig bestimmte Teile der Gerte unter Span-
nung. Einige Teile knnen auch eine hohe Betriebstemperatur aufweisen.
Eine Nichtbeachtung dieser Situation und der Warnungshinweise kann zu Krperverlet-
zungen und Sachschden fhren.
Deshalb wird vorausgesetzt, dass nur geschultes und qualifiziertes Personal die
Anlagen installiert und wartet.
Das System entspricht den Anforderungen der EN 60950 / IEC 60950. Angeschlossene
Gerte mssen die zutreffenden Sicherheitsbestimmungen erfllen.


A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
3
Technical Description (TED)
Statements of compliance
FCC statement
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Shielded cables must be used with
this unit to ensure compliance with the Class A FCC limits.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant
to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates,
uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equip-
ment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required
to correct the interference at his own expense.
CE statement
The CE conformity declaration for the product is fulfilled when the system is built and cabled in line with
the information given in the manual and the documentation specified within it, such as installation
instructions, cable lists or the like. Where necessary project-specific documentation should be taken into
consideration. Deviations from the specifications or independent modifications to the layout, such as
use of cable types with lower screening values for example, can lead to violation of the CE protection
requirements. In such cases the conformity declaration is invalidated. The responsibility for any prob-
lems which subsequently arise rests with the party responsible for deviating from the installation spec-
ifications.


4 A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
Technical Description (TED)


A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
5
Technical Description (TED)
Table of Contents
This document has 167 pages.
1 Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1.1 Intended audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1.2 Structure of this document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1.3 Symbols and conventions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1.4 History of changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
2 Introduction to SURPASS hiT 7300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
2.1 General functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
2.2 Highlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
2.3 Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
2.4 Wavelength bands/frequency spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
2.5 CWDM support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
2.6 StrataLight OTS-4000. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
2.7 MPBC RMH07 series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
2.8 Compatibility with other systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
3 System functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
3.1 Optical transmission functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
3.1.1 Laser safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
3.1.2 Super Forward Error Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
3.1.3 Traffic protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
3.1.4 Control and management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
3.2 System management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
3.2.1 Optical Supervisory Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
3.2.2 Data Communication Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
3.2.3 Network Time Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
3.2.4 Engineering Order Wire interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
3.2.5 User channels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
3.2.6 Telemetry Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
3.3 Performance management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
3.4 Fault management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
3.4.1 Alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
3.4.2 Alarm Indication Signal behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
3.5 Loopback behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
3.5.1 I04T2G5-1 loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
3.5.2 I01T10G-1 loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
3.5.3 I08T10G-1 loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
4 Network Elements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
4.1 Optical Line Repeater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
4.2 Optical Network Node. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
4.2.1 Optical Network Node - Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
4.2.2 Optical Network Node - Interconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
4.2.3 Optical Network Node - Reconfigurable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
4.2.4 Optical Network Node - Small . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
4.3 Standalone Optical Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58


6 A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
Technical Description (TED)
4.3.1 Passive DWDM applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
4.3.2 Long single span applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
5 Supported cards and equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
5.1 Controller cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
5.2 Line Amplifier cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
5.3 Raman Pump card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
5.4 External pump cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
5.5 Channel power monitor card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
5.6 Booster-less line interface card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
5.7 Filter cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
5.7.1 F04MDN-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
5.7.2 F04MDU-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
5.7.3 F08SB-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
5.7.4 F16SB-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
5.7.5 F40-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
5.7.6 F40MR-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
5.8 CWDM equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
5.8.1 Patch-cord solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
5.8.2 Filter pack solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
5.9 Variable Optical Attenuator cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
5.10 Dispersion Compensation Module cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
5.11 Unidirectional Dispersion Compensation Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
5.12 Transponder cards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
5.12.1 I04T2G5-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
5.12.2 I01T10G-1 Regio/LH(S)/LHD(S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
5.12.3 I08T10G-1 LH(S)/LHD(S)/Regio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
5.13 Optical channel protection card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
6 Mechanical design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
6.1 Shelves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
6.1.1 Shelf design details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
6.1.2 Shelf fan unit and air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
6.1.3 Connector Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
6.2 Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
6.2.1 Rack arrangements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
6.2.2 Power Distribution Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
6.2.3 TIF distribution panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
6.3 Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
6.3.1 Blank panels and faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
6.3.2 Card label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
6.3.3 Card faceplate LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
6.3.4 Controller card faceplate elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
7 System bring-up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
7.1 Planning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
7.2 Delivery formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
7.3 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
7.4 Commissioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100


A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
7
Technical Description (TED)
8 Network management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
8.1 SURPASS hiT 7300 Local Craft Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
8.2 @CT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
8.3 TNMS CT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
8.4 TNMS Core/CDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
8.5 Access and security management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
8.5.1 Network Element access management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
8.5.2 User security management and access control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
8.6 Network management interfaces and architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
8.6.1 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
8.6.2 Architecture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
9 Technical data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
9.1 Physical layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
9.2 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
9.2.1 Line interfaces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
9.2.2 Client interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
9.2.3 Management interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
9.3 Cards and equipments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
9.3.1 Controller cards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
9.3.2 Line amplifier cards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
9.3.3 Raman Pump card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
9.3.4 External pump card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
9.3.5 Channel power monitor card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
9.3.6 Booster-less line interface card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
9.3.7 Filter cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
9.3.8 CWDM equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
9.3.9 Variable Optical Attenuator cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
9.3.10 Dispersion Compensation Module cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
9.3.11 UDCM cards and tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
9.3.12 Transponder cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
9.3.13 Optical channel protection card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
9.4 Supervision and control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
9.5 Power supply and system consumptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
9.5.1 Rack and shelf power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
9.5.2 Shelves power consumption. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
9.5.3 Cards and units power consumption. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
9.6 Environmental specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
9.7 Shelves mechanical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
9.8 Racks mechanical data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
9.9 PC requirements for the LCT software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
10 Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165


8 A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
Technical Description (TED)
List of Figures
Figure 1 SURPASS hiT 7300 in network environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Figure 2 Network topologies using SURPASS hiT 7300 OLR and ONN NEs . . . 20
Figure 3 Network topologies using SURPASS hiT 7300 SON NE . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Figure 4 CWDM client traffic aggregation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Figure 5 CWDM connection of a remote SON terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Figure 6 I04T2G5-1 OChP architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Figure 7 10 Gbit/s OChP architecture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Figure 8 Optical link communication between NEs example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Figure 9 Optical Supervisory Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Figure 10 NTP synchronization example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Figure 11 EOW conference call setup (interconnected ring network example) . . . 35
Figure 12 User channels setup example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Figure 13 I04T2G5-1 loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Figure 14 I01TG10-1 loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Figure 15 I08TG10-1 loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Figure 16 Optical path sections example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Figure 17 OLR structure example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Figure 18 Flexible filter structure for EOL=12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Figure 19 Flexible filter structure for EOL=20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Figure 20 Flexible filter structure for EOL=32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Figure 21 Flexible filter structure for EOL=40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Figure 22 Full access filter structure using F40-1 cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Figure 23 ONN-T structure example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Figure 24 ONN-I structure example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Figure 25 ONN-R structure example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Figure 26 ONN-S structure example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Figure 27 SON flexible filter structure for passive DWDM (EOL=40) . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Figure 28 Passive SON terminal filter structure with F40-1 filter cards (EOL=40) . 60
Figure 29 SON structure example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Figure 30 Long single span architecture using SON and RMH07 series equipment .
61
Figure 31 Line amplifier cards basic structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Figure 32 PRC-1 basic structure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Figure 33 MCP404-1 and MCP404-2 functional diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Figure 34 F04MDN-1 card structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Figure 35 F04MDU-1 card structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Figure 36 F08SB-1 card structure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Figure 37 F16SB-1 card structure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Figure 38 F40-1 card structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Figure 39 F40MR-1 card structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Figure 40 CWDM add/drop patch-cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Figure 41 CWDM filter pack shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Figure 42 FC01MDUP-1/n, FC04MDUP-1/E and FC04MDP-1/C functional diagrams
73
Figure 43 UDCM plug-in box and tray. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Figure 44 SFP module (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77


A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
9
Technical Description (TED)
Figure 45 Mapping schemes of client signals to OTU1 optical channel. . . . . . . . . 79
Figure 46 XFP module (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Figure 47 Mapping schemes of client signals to OTU2V optical channel . . . . . . . 81
Figure 48 Mapping schemes of client signals to OTU2V optical channel . . . . . . . 83
Figure 49 O03CP-1 basic structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Figure 50 SURPASS hiT 7300 ANSI and ETSI shelves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Figure 51 ANSI and ETSI shelf details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Figure 52 Connector panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Figure 53 Rack arrangements; ANSI 7-foot and ETSI 2200 mm racks . . . . . . . . . 90
Figure 54 CTDP-1 faceplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Figure 55 Cards design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Figure 56 Card label location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Figure 57 CCEP-1 front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Figure 58 SURPASS TransNet network planning example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Figure 59 Network management functions according to ITU-T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Figure 60 Craft terminals in a transmission network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Figure 61 System architecture of TNMS Core/CDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Figure 62 Network management interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Figure 63 TMN systems connection via gateway NE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107


10 A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
Technical Description (TED)
List of Tables
Table 1 Main chapters overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Table 2 List of conventions used in this document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Table 3 Document history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Table 4 SURPASS hiT 7300 available OADM architectures using ONN NEs . . 18
Table 5 Frequency/wavelength of SURPASS hiT 7300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Table 6 CWDM supported wavelengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Table 7 Combinations of working/protection line ports and client ports on the
I04T2G5-1 card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Table 8 NTP server definition in each NE role . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Table 9 Default TIF actors functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Table 10 AIS implementation with I04T2G5-1 card,
Client In to Line Out direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Table 11 AIS implementation with I04T2G5-1 card,
Line In to Client Out direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Table 12 AIS implementation with I01T10G-1 card,
Client In to Line Out direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Table 13 AIS implementation with I01T10G-1 card,
Line In to Client Out direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Table 14 AIS implementation with I08T10G-1 card,
Client In to Line Out direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Table 15 AIS implementation with I08T10G-1 card,
Line In to Client Out direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Table 16 SURPASS hiT 7300 NEs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Table 17 EOL counts overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Table 18 Card name scheme explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Table 19 Controller cards overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Table 20 Line amplifier cards overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Table 21 Raman pump card overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Table 22 External pump cards overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Table 23 Channel power monitor card overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Table 24 OSC termination card overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Table 25 Filter cards overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Table 26 CWDM filter modules overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Table 27 VOA card overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Table 28 DCM cards overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Table 29 UDCM cards overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Table 30 Transponder cards overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Table 31 I04T2G5-1 card GbE SFP client interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Table 32 I04T2G5-1 card STM-16 and OC-48 SFP client interfaces . . . . . . . . . . 78
Table 33 I04T2G5-1 card OTU1 SFP client interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Table 34 I04T2G5-1 card FC and FICON SFP client interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Table 35 I01T10G-1 card 10GbE XFP client interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Table 36 I01T10G-1 STM-64 and OC-192 10 Gbit/s XFP client interfaces . . . . . 81
Table 37 I01T10G-1 OTU2 10 Gbit/s XFP client interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Table 38 I08T10G-1 card GbE SFP client interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Table 39 I08T10G-1 card STM-16 and OC-48 SFP client interfaces . . . . . . . . . . 82


A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
11
Technical Description (TED)
Table 40 I08T10G-1 card OTU1 SFP client interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Table 41 OChP card overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Table 42 Shelf types description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Table 43 COPA connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Table 44 CTDP-1 connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Table 45 Standard front LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Table 46 Controller card variants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Table 47 Controller card interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Table 48 Physical layers, general information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Table 49 Physical layers, interface at point MPI-S
M
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Table 50 Physical layers, optical path (single span) from point MPI-SM to
point MPI-RM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Table 51 Physical layers, interface at point MPI-R
M
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Table 52 DWDM-SFP (2.5G) (standard version) optical line
interface specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Table 53 DWDM-SFP with extended dispersion tolerance (2.5G) optical line
interface specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Table 54 CWDM-SFP C8S1-0D2 and C8S1-1D2 optical line interface specifications
111
Table 55 CWDM-SFP C8L1-0D2 and C8L1-1D2 optical line interface specifications
112
Table 56 MSA300 (10G) Regio optical line interface specifications . . . . . . . . . 112
Table 57 MSA300 (10G) LH optical line interface specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Table 58 MSA300 (10G) MLSE optical line interface specifications . . . . . . . . . 114
Table 59 GbE SFP optical client interfaces specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Table 60 Electrical GbE client interfaces specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Table 61 10GbE XFP optical client interfaces specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Table 62 STM-16/OC-48 optical client interfaces specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Table 63 STM-64/OC-192 optical client interfaces specifications . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Table 64 OTU1 optical client interfaces specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Table 65 OTU2 optical client interfaces specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Table 66 FC and FICON optical client interfaces specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Table 67 User channels, ILANs, Q and QF interfaces specifications . . . . . . . . 128
Table 68 EOW handset interface specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Table 69 EOW shelf-interconnect interface specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Table 70 TIF interface specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Table 71 CTDP-1 specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Table 72 CCEP-1 card specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Table 73 CCMP-1 card specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Table 74 CCSP-1 card specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Table 75 LALIC-1, LALBC-1 and LALBCH-1 cards specifications . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Table 76 LALPC-1 card specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Table 77 LAMIC-1 card specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Table 78 LAMPC-1 card specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Table 79 LASBC-1 card specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Table 80 PRC-1 card specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Table 81 PL-1 card specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Table 82 MCP404-1 and MCP404-2 card specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138


12 A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
Technical Description (TED)
Table 83 LIFB-1 card specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Table 84 F04MDU-1 card specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Table 85 F04MDN-1 card specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Table 86 F08SB-1 card specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Table 87 F16SB-1 card specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Table 88 F40-1 card specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Table 89 F40MR-1 card specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Table 90 CWDM equipment specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Table 91 O08VA-1 card specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Table 92 D0340SMF, D0680SMF, D1020SMF, D1360SMF, D1700SMF,
D0340LEF, D0510LEF and D0680LEF cards specifications . . . . . . . . 145
Table 93 D0340DCF, D0510DCF and D0680DCF cards specifications . . . . . . . 145
Table 94 D1020DCF and D1360DCF cards specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Table 95 UDCM cards and tray specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Table 96 I04T2G5-1 card specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Table 97 I01T10G-1 Regio/LH card specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Table 98 I08T10G-1 card specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Table 99 O03CP-1 card specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Table 100 OSC specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Table 101 DCN specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Table 102 Rack and shelf power supply specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Table 103 Electrical power consumption of the shelves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Table 104 Electrical power consumption of the cards and units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Table 105 System environmental specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Table 106 Dimensions and weight of the shelves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Table 107 Dimensions and weight of the ANSI rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Table 108 Dimensions and weight of the standard and hiT 7300 ETSI rack . . . . 158
Table 109 Minimum PC requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159


A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
13
Technical Description (TED) Preface
1 Preface
This chapter describes the audience, structure, conventions and history of changes of
the SURPASS hiT 7300 Technical Description Guide.
1.1 Intended audience
This document is intended for all personnel that require a general introduction and
overview of the SURPASS hiT 7300 system.
1.2 Structure of this document
This document comprises the following main chapters:
g Some features described in this documentation may not be available. In order to
identify the features released for your project, please refer to the Release Notes
delivered together with the product.
1.3 Symbols and conventions
The following symbols and conventions are used in this document:
Chapter Title Subject
Chapter 1 Preface Provides an introduction to this document.
Chapter 2 Introduction
Gives a general introduction to the
SURPASS hiT 7300 functionality and
typical applications.
Chapter 3 System functions
Describes the most important functions of
the system.
Chapter 4 Network Elements
Describes the available network elements
and their subtypes.
Chapter 5 Supported cards
Lists all available cards and their main
functions within the system.
Chapter 6 Mechanical design
Provides an overview of the mechanical
features of shelves, racks, and cards.
Chapter 7 System bring-up
Provides some basic information about
the systems planning, installation, and
commissioning.
Chapter 8 Network management
Provides an overview of the network
management software, interfaces, and
architecture.
Chapter 9 Technical data
Contains technical data of all the systems
components, i.e., shelves, cards, etc.
Chapter 10 Abbreviations
Contains a list with the meaning of all the
abbreviations used within this manual.
Table 1 Main chapters overview


14 A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
Technical Description (TED) Preface
Conventions used
Symbols used
g Used for notes, tips, or additional information.
Representation Meaning
Inverted commas Window names and wizard titles are denoted with inverted
commas.
Example: Open the Help and Support Center window. The
New Connection wizard is displayed.
Bold Field names, buttons, and text on GUIs are denoted by bold
type.
Example: Click Shutdown and then click OK to turn off the
computer.
Italic Variables and file extensions are denoted by italic text.
Example: Enter 192.168.0.1 in the IP address field. Click OK to
produce a .pdf rendition.
Courier Commands, screen output, file names and paths are
represented by using courier font.
Example: # ping -t 192.168.0.1
<Angle brackets> Keyboard actions or place holders for distinct names or values
are represented by enclosing them in <angle brackets>. If a file
name is involved, the courier font will also be used.
Example: The naming convention for the log files is
<NEname>.txt, where <NEName> is the name of the NE
sending the messages. Press <CTRL>+<ALT><DEL> to open
the task manager.
> Used for menu sequences.
Example: Click File > Print... to print the document.
Table 2 List of conventions used in this document
!
Caution: means that the reader must be careful. Loss of data or equipment damage are
possible if caution is not exercised by the user.
!
Warning: a warning symbol means danger. A situation exists that could cause bodily
injury or death. Before working on any equipment, the user must be aware of the
hazards involved with electrical circuitry and be familiar with standard practices for pre-
venting accidents.


A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
15
Technical Description (TED) Preface
1.4 History of changes
Issue Issue date Remarks
1 September 2007 Initial version.
2 December 2007 Maintenance release.
Table 3 Document history


16 A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
Technical Description (TED) Introduction to SURPASS hiT 7300
2 Introduction to SURPASS hiT 7300
This chapter provides a general introduction to the SURPASS hiT 7300 functionalities
and typical applications.
2.1 General functionality
Nokia Siemens Networks SURPASS hiT 7300 is a high performance multi-haul Dense
Wavelength Division Multiplexing (DWDM) transmission system, with a powerful multi-
purpose transponder platform. SURPASS hiT 7300 has the required capacity in metro-
politan, regional and backbone networks to transport all kinds of services with high effi-
ciency.
The high capacity DWDM transmission system of SURPASS hiT 7300 allows up to 40
optical wavelengths to be transported over Ultra Long Haul (ULH) distances via the
same fiber.
The transponder equipment of SURPASS hiT 7300 serves as a multi-service gateway
between the client signals and the DWDM transport network. This combination of
DWDM and transponder equipment provides the building blocks required for optical net-
working.
Figure 1 provides a general overview of SURPASS hiT 7300 in a network environment.
Figure 1 SURPASS hiT 7300 in network environment
2.2 Highlights
SURPASS hiT 7300 provides:
Maximum transmission capacity of 1.6 Tbit/s (40 x 40 Gbit/s) per fiber with 100 GHz
channel spacing.
Fixed part of mobile
NGN Mobile
Enterprise
Ethernet, SAN,
TDM
Ethernet P
PBX
Carrier's voice and data
Local exchange
Residential
BB nternet
Access, voice, TV
TV
Router interconnect
Core Router
SP peering
SP
POP
BRAS
Carriers' carrier
/ or lower bit
rate services
SURPASS hiT 7300 network
TNMS
Core/CDM


A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
17
Technical Description (TED) Introduction to SURPASS hiT 7300
ULH networking with extended reach (up to 2000 km), achieved with:
High performance optical amplifiers.
Optional Raman amplification.
Optional external laser pumps.
Super Forward Error Correction (S-FEC).
Powerful link control software to manage the channel power levels.
Ultra long spans and hut skipping.
Modularity from 1 to 40 channels in the C-band, with 1-channel increments.
Coarse Wavelength Division Multiplexing (CWDM) support for a low cost implemen-
tation of a passive optical multiplexing system.
Full G.709 implementation to enable Optical Transport Hierarchy (OTH) functionality
including end-to-end provisioning and management of wavelengths across multiple
vendor sub-networks.
Interwork with StrataLight OTS-4000 Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
equipment, allowing 40 Gbit/s wavelengths together with 10 Gbit/s wavelengths on
the same fiber.
Interwork with MPB Communications RMH07 series OEM equipment for long single
span applications.
1+1 optical channel protection against signal failures (of the optical channel) or
equipment failures, for 2.5 Gbit/s and 10 Gbit/s traffic.
High compactness.
Sophisticated optical control, including:
Dynamic gain and output power control for adjusting gain and power fluctua-
tions.
End-to-end pre-emphasis for fine tuning of power variations.
European Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI) and the American
National Standards Institute (ANSI) rack mounting.
Common shelf type for all Network Elements (NE).
Up to 111 NEs in a single Data Communication Network (DCN) domain.
Flexible and FullAccess Optical Add-Drop Multiplexer (OADM) as well as Remotely
reconfigurable OADM with capability for 100% traffic add/drop.
Standard slot interface for all plug-in cards (except controller card).
Optional booster-less interface for cost-optimized solutions in regional networks.
Dispersion compensation with plug-in cards Fiber Bragg Grating (FBG) and Disper-
sion Compensation Fiber (DCF) based, as well as optional separate DCF modules.
Fiber type flexibility, e.g.:
Standard Single Mode Fiber (SSMF)
Large Effective Area Fiber (LEAF)
Medium Dispersion Fiber (MDF)
TrueWave-Cable (TW-C)
Dispersion Shifted Fiber (DSF)
Pure Silica Core Fiber (PSCF) (for long single spans only)
Fibers with high polarization mode dispersion for 2.5 Gbit/s, 10 Gbit/s and 40
Gbit/s line rates
Service flexibility to meet all customer traffic requirements:


18 A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
Technical Description (TED) Introduction to SURPASS hiT 7300
Ethernet
SDH/SONET
Fiber Channel (FC)/FICON
OTH
Dispersion tolerant transponders.
Tunable laser transponders for wavelength changes without the need to swap plug-
in cards, thus enabling simplified installation and commissioning and easier
handling of spare parts.
Network management by:
Telecommunication Network Management System Core/Cross Domain
Manager (TNMS Core/CDM)
Telecommunication Network Management System Craft Terminal (TNMS CT)
Web-based Craft Terminal (@CT)
SURPASS TransNet planning tool for simplified and comprehensive network design
on a geographical map, including cost optimization.
2.3 Applications
SURPASS hiT 7300 can be used in any kind of network topology, including:
Transparent photonic point-to-point topologies
Chains
Rings
Mesh networks
Long single spans
Basically, in a typical SURPASS hiT 7300 optical network, the following NE types are
used:
Optical Line Repeater (OLR)
Optical Network Node (ONN) with the following subtypes:
Optical Network Node - Interconnect (ONN-I)
Optical Network Node - Reconfigurable (ONN-R)
Optical Network Node - Small (ONN-S)
Optical Network Node - Terminal (ONN-T)
Stand-alone Optical Node (SON)
Table 4 describes the possible OADM architectures and respective characteristics when
using SURPASS hiT 7300 ONN NEs.
Possible OADM
architectures
Small
OADM
Terminal
1/2 OADM
Flexible
OADM
FullAccess
OADM
Reconfig.
OADM
ONN subtypes ONN-S ONN-T ONN-I ONN-R ONN-R
100% add/drop capability X X X X
Arbitrary choice of routing status
per wavelength
X X X X
Low optical penalty X X X X X
Multi-degree (n=1..6) nodes with
in-service upgradeability
(n=2) (n=1) X X X
Table 4 SURPASS hiT 7300 available OADM architectures using ONN NEs


A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
19
Technical Description (TED) Introduction to SURPASS hiT 7300
The NE types and subtypes are described in detail in chapter 4.
Figure 2 and Figure 3 display the network topologies which can be implemented, when
using SURPASS hiT 7300 NEs.
End-to-end commissioning
without visiting intermediate sites
X X
Drop of arbitrary channels
without deploying additional
filters
X X
Lower operation/administration
cost through reduced NE and
cabling complexity
X X
Optimized for high channel count X X X
Optimized for low channel count X X X
Pay as you grow concept X X
Possible OADM
architectures
Small
OADM
Terminal
1/2 OADM
Flexible
OADM
FullAccess
OADM
Reconfig.
OADM
ONN subtypes ONN-S ONN-T ONN-I ONN-R ONN-R
Table 4 SURPASS hiT 7300 available OADM architectures using ONN NEs (Cont.)


20 A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
Technical Description (TED) Introduction to SURPASS hiT 7300
Figure 2 Network topologies using SURPASS hiT 7300 OLR and ONN NEs
Point-to-Point
Chain
Ring
Meshed
SURPASS
hiT 7300 NEs
ONN-T
OLR
ONN-/R/S
SURPASS hiT 70xx
SN 16000
P Router
L2 Switch
Non SURPASS
hiT 7300 client NEs


A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
21
Technical Description (TED) Introduction to SURPASS hiT 7300
Figure 3 Network topologies using SURPASS hiT 7300 SON NE
The SURPASS hiT 7300 DWDM system has an integral optical add-drop multiplexer
that can hold a mixed configuration of 2.5 Gbit/s, 10 Gbit/s and 40 Gbit/s systems, with
40 wavelengths at up to 40 Gbit/s each.
SURPASS hiT 7300 can be used in the following application segments:
ULH DWDM applications, for long path lengths of up to 1600 km.
Long Haul (LH) DWDM applications, reaching up to 1200 km.
Regional DWDM applications with path lengths starting at 200 km and for high traffic
volumes. These networks are often used as regional collector networks to feed into
LH portions of the network. Regional DWDM networks have typical path lengths of
up to 500 km.
Metro DWDM applications, for short path lengths of up to 200 km.
Long single span applications using SON NEs and MPBC RMH07 equipment.
2.4 Wavelength bands/frequency spacing
The SURPASS hiT 7300 uses a maximum of 40 wavelengths within the C-band, with
100 GHz frequency spacing.
Table 5 lists all the frequencies/wavelengths of the 40 channels used by the SURPASS
hiT 7300
Point-to-Point
(passive solution)
SON as remote
transponder
Long single span
with MPBC RMH07
SURPASS
hiT 7300 NEs
ONN-T
SON
SURPASS hiT 70xx
SN 16000
P Router
L2 Switch
Non SURPASS
hiT 7300 client NEs
MPBC RMH07


22 A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
Technical Description (TED) Introduction to SURPASS hiT 7300
Channels
Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) Sub-band
196.00 1529.55
C01
195.90 1530.33
195.80 1531.12
195.70 1531.90
195.60 1532.68
C02
195.50 1533.47
195.40 1534.25
195.30 1535.04
195.20 1535.82
C03
195.10 1536.61
195.00 1537.40
194.90 1538.19
194.80 1538.98
C04
194.70 1539.77
194.60 1540.56
194.50 1541.35
194.40 1542.14
C05
194.30 1542.94
194.20 1543.73
194.10 1544.53
194.00 1545.32
C06
193.90 1546.12
193.80 1546.92
193.70 1547.72
193.60 1548.51
C07
193.50 1549.32
193.40 1550.12
193.30 1550.92
193.20 1551.72
C08
193.10 1552.52
193.00 1553.33
192.90 1554.13
Table 5 Frequency/wavelength of SURPASS hiT 7300


A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
23
Technical Description (TED) Introduction to SURPASS hiT 7300
g There are several possibilities to build up systems with different channel numbers
at the Begin-of-Life (BOL) or at the End-of-Life (EOL), therefore allowing cost-effi-
cient system configurations during the complete life cycle of the system.
The channel upgrade is handled via Nokia Siemens Networks SURPASS TransNet
network planning tool. SURPASS TransNet supplies all the information about the
channel upgrade order (see chapter 7.1).
2.5 CWDM support
The CWDM sub-system allows a very simple and low cost implementation of a passive
(no amplification required) optical multiplexing system which can be used for data col-
lection and aggregation of multiple client data from different remote locations within
enterprise or small metropolitan networks.
The CWDM sub-system can be applied as a feeder system for a SURPASS hiT 7300
NE or can simply be used as a standalone system for interconnection between first mile
access equipment and second mile aggregation switches.
The CWDM sub-system main features are:
Support of 8 wavelengths from CWDM grid (according to ITU-T G.694.2) with
CWDM interfaces (according to ITU-T G.695).
Independent from SURPASS hiT 7300 shelf.
Mechanical integration either by cascadable CWDM add/drop patch-cord connec-
tors, or by cascadable CWDM filter modules plugged into 1 HU filter pack shelves
(see chapter 5.8).
Compatible with ANSI, hiT 7300 ETSI and standard ETSI racks.
Compliant with Telcordia GR-1209 and GR-1221 for central office conditions.
Table 6 lists all the CWDM frequencies supported by the CWDM sub-system.
192.80 1554.94
C09
192.70 1555.75
192.60 1556.55
192.50 1557.36
192.40 1558.17
C10
192.30 1558.98
192.20 1559.79
192.10 1560.61
Channels
Frequency (THz) Wavelength (nm) Sub-band
Table 5 Frequency/wavelength of SURPASS hiT 7300 (Cont.)
Wavelengths (nm) Channel number
1471 1
1491 2
Table 6 CWDM supported wavelengths


24 A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
Technical Description (TED) Introduction to SURPASS hiT 7300
For reach calculation and interconnection of CWDM applications, please contact your
Nokia Siemens Networks sales representative.
The CWDM sub-system can be used on various network applications. The following
scenarios are supported:
Cascading of carrier Ethernet switches (e.g., SURPASS hiD66xx) using CWDM col-
lector network.
CWDM client traffic aggregation for SURPASS hiT 7300 NEs, also allowing redun-
dant CWDM client protection (see Figure 4).
CWDM connection of remote SON to SURPASS hiT 7300 NEs (with a possible
interconnection protection) (see Figure 5).
Figure 4 CWDM client traffic aggregation
1511 3
1531 4
1551 5
1571 6
1591 7
1611 8
Wavelengths (nm) Channel number
Table 6 CWDM supported wavelengths (Cont.)
client
line
SURPASS hiT 7300 NE
C
W
D
M

M
U
X
C
W
D
M

c
l
i
e
n
t
CWDM ring
working protection
CWDM MUX
CWDM MUX
C
W
D
M

M
U
X
CWDM
client
C
W
D
M

c
l
i
e
n
t

0
4
T
2
G
5
-
1
/

0
8
T
1
0
G
-
1

0
4
T
2
G
5
-
1
/

0
8
T
1
0
G
-
1


A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
25
Technical Description (TED) Introduction to SURPASS hiT 7300
Figure 5 CWDM connection of a remote SON terminal
2.6 StrataLight OTS-4000
The StrataLight OTS-4000 is a 40 Gbit/s DWDM transponder/muxponder equipment,
based on lightwave modulation technology which narrows the spectral width of 40 Gbit/s
signals. This enables multi-haul transmission, allowing 40 Gbit/s wavelengths to be
mixed with 10 Gbit/s wavelengths on the same fiber. The modulation technology
enables extension of unregenerated transmission distances.
StrataLight OTS-4000 can interwork with SURPASS hiT 7300 without the need of any
additional systems.
For detailed information about the StrataLight OTS-4000 equipment, please refer to the
StrataLight OTS-4000 customer documentation.
2.7 MPBC RMH07 series
The RMH07 Long Reach Transport Series from MPB Communications consists of
amplifiers designed to transmit and receive signals over fiber optic links from 100 to
more than 400 km in one single span using SON NEs.
The amplifiers are based on Erbium Doped Fiber Amplifier (EDFA) and Raman technol-
ogy. The full equipment suite includes devices for managing the RMH07 series equip-
ment both at the shelf and network levels.
The RMH07 series equipment provides optical interworking with SURPASS hiT 7300 10
Gibt/s transponders, optical multiplexer cards and dispersion compensation cards.
For detailed information about the RMH07 series, please refer to the MPBC RMH07
series customer documentation.
2.8 Compatibility with other systems
SURPASS hiT 7300 presents wide channel pass-bands for compatibility with 2.5 Gbit/s,
10 Gbit/s or 40 Gbit/s terminal equipment.
SURPASS hiT 7300 is compatible with the following equipment:
ADVA FSP3000
SN16000
SURPASS hiT 7060
SURPASS hiT 7070
SURPASS hiT 7080
ONN
C
W
D
M

M
U
X

CWDM
connection
G
b
E
/
F
C
/

S
T
M
-
1
6
SON
#1
#2
04T2G5-1 or
08T10G-1

O
T
U
1

C
W
D
M

c
l
i
e
n
t
s


#1
#2
D
W
D
M

l
i
n
e

/
F
s


CWDM
connection
D
W
D
M

M
U
X

amplifiers
DWDM line
DWDM line
#1
#2
04T2G5-1
l
i
n
e
c
l
i
e
n
t
s
#1
#2
#1
#2
04T2G5-1
l
i
n
e
c
l
i
e
n
t
s
#1
#2
#1
#2
04T2G5-1
l
i
n
e
c
l
i
e
n
t
s
#1
#2
OTU1
OTU1
OTU1
work.
prot.
G
b
E
/
F
C
/

S
T
M
-
1
6
G
b
E
/
F
C
/

S
T
M
-
1
6
amplifiers
04T2G5-1 or
08T10G-1
O
T
U
1

C
W
D
M

c
l
i
e
n
t
s
D
W
D
M

l
i
n
e

/
F
s
C
W
D
M

M
U
X
C
W
D
M

D
M
U
X
C
W
D
M

D
M
U
X
D
W
D
M

M
U
X


26 A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
Technical Description (TED) Introduction to SURPASS hiT 7300
SURPASS hiT 7500
SURPASS hiT 7540
SURPASS hiT 7540c
SURPASS hiT 7550


A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
27
Technical Description (TED) System functions
3 System functions
This chapter describes important system functions of the SURPASS hiT 7300 system.
For instructions on how to configure and operate many of the features described in this
chapter, please refer to the Operating Manual (OMN) of SURPASS hiT 7300.
3.1 Optical transmission functions
The following sub-chapters provide information about optical transmission functions of
the SURPASS hiT 7300 system such as safety mechanisms, correction techniques, and
control and management systems.
3.1.1 Laser safety
Optical safety mechanisms are indispensable to protect all users from harmful light
emissions of optical amplifiers and pump light sources.
The laser safety mechanisms of the SURPASS hiT 7300 transmission system are
designed for IEC60825-2:2004+A1:2006 hazard level 1M (21.3 dBm@1550 nm) at
open connector.
The SURPASS hiT 7300 NEs have to be operated in "Controlled Location" according to
IEC60825-2:2004+A1:2006. Alternatively, at costumer request, SURPASS hiT 7300
equipment can be prepared for operation in "Restricted Location", as defined in IEC
60825-2:2004+A1:2006.
For a more detailed information about laser safety procedures and handling, please
refer to the Safety Instructions document.
The main mechanisms to guarantee the hazard levels are Automatic Power Shut Down
(APSD) and Automatic Power Reduction Mode (APRM).
The APSD function scheme is triggered immediately, when the transmission fiber
system is opened. The lasers are shut-down in the line amplifier and Raman pump
emitting toward the open fiber end. Normal operation is recovered within seconds once
the fiber system is closed.
The APRM function is triggered when in an ONN demultiplexing path, a fiber carrying
class 3B power is opened. The lasers in the last stages of the pre-amplifier are reduced
in power so that class 1M power is emitted toward the open fiber end. Normal operation
is recovered within seconds once the fiber system is closed.
Laser Safety Bus
In SURPASS hiT 7300 the Laser Safety Bus (LSB) rings ensure a safe NE operation by
providing:
APSD of amplifiers feeding the transmission line fiber pair.
APRM of a pre-amplifier feeding the demultiplexer filter tree.
For detailed information about SURPASS hiT 7300 cards, please refer to chapter 5.
!
The LSB rings are achieved by interconnecting, according to SURPASS TransNet cable
report, all the shelfs of the NE via APSD cables.
The removal of one, or more APSD cables will trigger laser safety shutdown mecha-
nisms and consequentially lead to traffic loss.


28 A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
Technical Description (TED) System functions
3.1.2 Super Forward Error Correction
The S-FEC and the Forward Error Correction (FEC) techniques optimize the level of
signal performance by providing a better Optical Signal to Noise Ratio (OSNR) tolerance
at the transponders, i.e., FEC/S-FEC enables the system to withstand more signal
noise.
With increasing transmission rates, distance-limiting phenomena such as fiber non-lin-
earity, chromatic dispersion, and Polarization Mode Dispersion (PMD) have a more pro-
nounced effect. Bit error correction has an important task since it increases the ability to
have a higher reach. Distances that, without S-FEC would suffer an unacceptable
receive-end OSNR can be successfully spanned with the use of S-FEC. S-FEC provides
networks with additional OSNR margin.
S-FEC is a coding algorithm that enables bit error detection and correction. It is applied
on the line side only, whereas on the client side the standard FEC technique can be
used. S-FEC is a "forward" scheme, i.e., the receiver receives only the information
needed to detect and correct bit errors and never requests a re-transmission.
Note that Optical channel Data Unit (ODU) and section Optical Transport Unit (OTU)
layers in the BIP-8 path provide error monitoring based on the payload. S-FEC provides
error correction in the client's payload and all the overheads (OPU-OH, ODU-OH, OTU-
OH). The Optical channel Payload Unit (OPU), ODU and OTU are the sub-layers of the
optical channel (client signal), as defined in ITU-T G.709.
3.1.3 Traffic protection
The protection of all the traffic generated by SURPASS hiT 7300 is achieved with an
Optical Channel Protection (OChP) switching on the I04T2G5-1 transponder card or an
OChP card (O03CP-1) for the I01T10G-1 and I08T10G-1 cards (see chapter 5.13).
The OChP switching on the I04T2G5-1 transponder card is realized at the electrical
signal level by 1+1 ODUk trail protection according to ITU-T G.873.1. When using an
O03CP-1 card the optical protection switching acts by switching ON or OFF the lasers
of the two transponder cards (I01T10G-1 or I08T10G-1).
Protection switching is achieved with a non-revertive switching behavior. Manual switch-
ing, forced switching, and switching lockout features can be executed remotely by the
user via software commands.
In a line protection scenario when a protection request by the NE is detected, the pro-
tection switching is completed within less than 50 ms. For an equipment protection
scenario the protection switching is completed within less than 200 ms.
OChP for the I04T2G5-1 card
The I04T2G5-1 architecture supports a 1+1 OChP at the line side for individual optical
channels transporting optical or electrical Gigabit Ethernet (GbE), STM-16/OC-48,
FC/FICON 1G, and FC/FICON 2G client signals.
The OChP of the ODU1 provides both traffic and equipment protection during:
Signal failures of the optical channel within the optical link.
Equipment failures on the transponder cards (severe failure in line Small Form-
Factor Pluggable (SFP)), upstream filters and amplifier cards.
The OChP, of the I04T2G5-1 transponder card is achieved by two protection schemes
(described in Table 7).


A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
29
Technical Description (TED) System functions
In the client side, the STM-16/OC-48 or FC/FICON 2G signals protection is performed
on one client interface (port 1). On the other hand, the GbE and FC/FICON 1G signals
protection is performed on two client interfaces (ports 1 and 2).
In the line side, for both schemes, line port 1 is used as the working port, whereas line
port 2 is used as the protection port as described in Table 7.
Figure 6 displays the OChP architecture of the I04T2G5-1 transponder card.
Figure 6 I04T2G5-1 OChP architecture
OChP for the I01T10G-1 and I08T10G-1 cards
The 10 Gbit/s protection is achieved with a pair of 10 Gbit/s transponder cards
(I01T10G-1 or I08T10G-1) in adjacent slots together with an O03CP-1 card.
g The protection transponder can be added later, but the slot has to be planned and
reserved by SURPASS TransNet. To avoid traffic interruption, the protection card
O03CP-1 has to be used together with the working transponder card.
The O03CP-1 architecture provides a 1+1 OChP at the client side for:
10GbE and STM-64/OC-192 client signals on the I01T10G-1 transponder card.
Optical GbE and STM-16/OC-48 client signals on the I08T10G-1 transponder card.
Protected client
traffic port(s)
Working line port
(trail)
Protection line port
(trail)
1 (1 x STM-16/OC-48) 1 2
1 (1 x FC/FICON 2G) 1 2
1+2 (2 x GbE) 1 2
1+2 (2 x FC/FICON 1G) 1 2
Table 7 Combinations of working/protection line ports and client ports on the
I04T2G5-1 card
2.5 Gbit/s
Transponder
OTU1
OTU1
client
/F
Working path
Protection path
M
U
X
D
M
U
X
MUX/DMUX
Amplifier
Amplifier
(booster)
(pre-amp)
Amplifier
(booster)
Amplifier
(pre-amp)
M
U
X
D
M
U
X
MUX/DMUX


30 A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
Technical Description (TED) System functions
g Electrical GbE interfaces on 10 Gbit/s transponders cannot be protected.
The 1+1 client protection provides both traffic and equipment protection during:
Signal failures of the optical channel within the optical link.
Equipment failures on the transponder cards (missing cards, power failures and
severe failures in laser modules on line interfaces), upstream filters and amplifier
cards.
A received External Open Connection Indication (EOCI).
Figure 7 displays the 10 Gbit/s OChP architecture using a O03CP-1 card.
Figure 7 10 Gbit/s OChP architecture
3.1.4 Control and management
Optical link control is intended to ensure optimized optical link operation in any link state.
The goals are to maintain sufficient link performance and consequently an equally dis-
tributed OSNR level at each channel's tail end (OSNR at optical receiver or regenerator
locations).
Within each individual NE, the controller card manages and controls all optical link
relevant information. Controller cards within an optical link exchange management infor-
mation as well as measurement data between each other.
Link management information, measurement data, and pre-emphasis control via XML-
RPC (for based control traffic between tail and head-end of pre-emphasis section)
needed for controlling the optical link is exchanged between NEs via the Optical Super-
visory Channel (OSC), described in chapter 3.2.1.
Working path
Protection path
Amplifier
Amplifier
(booster)
(pre-amp)
Amplifier
(booster)
Amplifier
(pre-amp)
O03CP-1
M
U
X
D
M
U
X
MUX/DMUX
OTU2
OTU2
client
/F
10Gbit/s
Transponder
M
U
X
D
M
U
X
MUX/DMUX
10Gbit/s
Transponder
OTU2
OTU2
client
/F


A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
31
Technical Description (TED) System functions
Figure 8 Optical link communication between NEs example
Communication links between NEs are established to properly operate all optical link
control mechanisms, for the whole link as well as for the NE (see Figure 8).
For detailed information about SURPASS hiT 7300 NEs, please refer to chapter 4.
Within each shelf, the controller card communicates with all "passive" cards (e.g., filter
and attenuator cards), using the Inter-Integrated Circuit (I
2
C) bus. "Active" cards (e.g.,
line amplifier and Raman pump cards) communicate via NE internal Ethernet with the
controller card.
The communication between shelves is achieved via two Ethernet Local Area Network
(LAN) connectors on the controller card.
Span loss supervision and correction
Span loss supervision and correction is done during system operation by any line ampli-
fier card.
The span loss correction compensates span loss by increasing or decreasing the
required gains of the line amplifier and keeps both the amplifier pre-tilt and the amplifier
total output power in a constant state for slow span loss changes.
A periodic supervision is performed against a predefined reference span loss. The ref-
erence span loss is identical to the EOL span loss used during link calculation.
g Span loss correction and supervision are disabled in case of APSD.
For detailed information and a step-by-step guide on Optical Link commissioning of the
SURPASS hiT 7300 system, please refer to the Optical Link Commissioning (OLC)
manual.
ONN-T OLR ONN-S ONN-T
Controller card Controller card Controller card Controller card
Line
amplifier
Line
amplifier
Line
amplifier
Line
amplifier
Line
amplifier
Line
amplifier
Line
amplifier
Line
amplifier
Line
amplifier
Line
amplifier
Filter (mux)
Filter (demux)
Filter (demux)
Filter (mux)
Channels
add/drop
Channels
add/drop
.
.
. .
.
.
.
.
. .
.
.
OSC OSC OSC
OSC OSC OSC


32 A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
Technical Description (TED) System functions
3.2 System management
The following sub-chapters provide information regarding:
OSC
DCN
Engineering Order Wire interface (EOW)
User channels
Telemetry Interface (TIF)
3.2.1 Optical Supervisory Channel
SURPASS hiT 7300 offers a 12.5 Mbit/s bit rate OSC with a bandwidth of 10 Mbit to
provide communications between all SURPASS hiT 7300 NEs.
The OSC supports all the network management communication required to set-up and
maintain a DWDM system configuration, fault management, performance monitoring,
and software maintenance.
The OSC uses the 1510 nm wavelength in both transmission directions, as displayed in
Figure 9.
Figure 9 Optical Supervisory Channel
3.2.2 Data Communication Network
A network of interconnected NEs is designated a DCN domain. The communication is
established via the OSC of the optical links and an Ethernet/L2 switching network imple-
mented by the NEs (Message Control Function (MCF)). A single DCN domain supports
up to of 111 NEs.
A Telecommunication Management Network (TMN) system (@CT, TNMS Core/CDM or
TNMS CT) communicates with a DCN domain via designated gateway NEs (using Q
and QF Ethernet interfaces).
The gateway NE separates the SURPASS hiT 7300 DCN from the customer network
using Network Address Port Translation forwarding (NAPT). The gateway function also
implements a File Transfer Protocol (FTP) proxy for file transfer and distribution
Q (LAN)
OLR
CCEP
ONN-T ONN-T
CCEP
ONN-S
CCEP
Q
CCEP
LCT mode NCT mode Customer network
OSC
(1510 nm)
OSC
(1510 nm)
OSC
(1510 nm)
OSC
(1510 nm)
OSC
(1510 nm)
OSC
(1510 nm)
QF


A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
33
Technical Description (TED) System functions
between an external FTP server and the NEs. Multiple gateway NEs can be used to
provide redundant access to the SURPASS hiT 7300 DCN.
The additional protocols and functions for network control, automation, and services
provided by the DCN are:
Address Resolution Protocol (APR).
Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) 802.1q tagging.
Fail-over detection between primary and secondary DHCP server implemented via
Common Address Redundancy Protocol (CARP).
Link supervision via Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP).
Uni-directional link detection.
Verification of static route entries by sending a ping via Internet Control Message
Protocol (ICMP) to the next hop and analyzing the reply.
Network management via Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).
Separate the DCN from the customer IP network via NAPT.
Software download/distribution via FTP (e.g., software download and distribution).
Pre-emphasis and file distribution control based on XML-RPC.
User channels with point-to-point Ethernet channel per link.
Time synchronization via Network Time Protocol (NTP).
Domain Name Service (DNS).
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP).
To maintain a loop-free topology of a switched DCN domain, the SURPASS hiT 7300
supports the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP).
3.2.3 Network Time Protocol
The NTP is used for time synchronization of the DCN. When synchronized, all NEs use
the same reference clock for time stamping of log entries, issued events, etc.
The NEs in the DCN rely on the NEs configured as DHCP servers for time synchroniza-
tion, i.e., they use the DHCP servers as NTP servers.
The NEs configured as DHCP servers must use external NTP (up to three) servers in
the customer network for time synchronization (see Figure 10).
Figure 10 NTP synchronization example
The NE chooses the actual NTP server among the available servers, since NTP protocol
allows redundant time synchronization.
Primary DHCP server Secondary DHCP server
Customer NTP servers
SURPASS hiT 7300
network


34 A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
Technical Description (TED) System functions
If no NTP server is available (external or DHCP server), the NE goes into a free-running
mode, depending only on its internal clock.
Table 8 lists the rules for each NE role concerning the NTP server definition. Each NE
must be set as described to obtain a correct time synchronization of all the NEs in the
DCN.
3.2.4 Engineering Order Wire interface
The EOW interface can be used to establish conference and selective calls from one NE
to other NE(s) using a handset.
When plugged, a handset is automatically in the same conference call with all the other
handsets connected to the same line. The communication line is set by all the shelves,
belonging to different NEs, that are interconnected by OSCs.
In case of a selective call the operator selects an NE by dialing a 3-digit number, which
is configured via LCT.
EOW calls are carried over OSC and transmitted together with the OSC payload via the
optical fiber along the entire transmission line.
In ring and meshed networks, the line may form a closed ring. A ring manager opens the
loop, to prevent the EOW call from feedback distortion.
Inter-shelf EOW connection in multi-degree ONNs is achieved with a 4-wire cable that
interconnects the controller cards of different shelves belonging to the same NE. This
allows EOW calls in interconnected rings and meshed networks (see Figure 11).
NE DHCP role NTP server
OLR
Server Enabled
Client Disabled
ONN
Server Enabled
Client Disabled
SON Server or Client Optional
Table 8 NTP server definition in each NE role


A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
35
Technical Description (TED) System functions
Figure 11 EOW conference call setup (interconnected ring network example)
An expansion Y 4-wire cable is also available to provide an additional EOW interface on
the controller card. The expansion cable can gather two EOW signals and is particularly
suited for multi-degree ONNs which comprise three or more optical paths.
3.2.5 User channels
The SURPASS hiT 7300 user channels are used for bidirectional connections between
NEs via the OSC, providing the customer with a point-to-point Ethernet connection for
specific data network or remote access to NEs not reachable via DCN.
The user channels are accessible via two Ethernet ports, User 1 and User 2 at NEs ter-
minating an OSC (see chapter 6.3.4).
For each Optical Transport Section (OTS) two user channels are available. However,
NEs located between the two ends of the optical path can carry up to four user channels
(two for each transmission direction) but only two can be accessed in each NE. Each
user channel carries a distinct VLAN tag to differentiate the user channels within the
same OTS.
Up to two user channels (belonging to different OTSs) can be terminated on each con-
troller card. If both user channels belong to the same OTS only one user channel can
be terminated. Transit user channels (i.e., transfer traffic routed to another OTS), are for-
warded to the respective OTS by the NE shelf controller.
In ONNs the user channels are terminated by default. However, they can be set to
through connected via LCT (within the same controller card) or by interconnecting the
User 1/User 2 connectors (of different controller cards) via a Ethernet cable. In OLRs,
the user channels are through connected by default. Using LCT, the through connection
can be opened and the user channels are accessible at OLRs also.
Figure 12 displays an example with point-to-point connections between ONNs and
OLRs, i.e., the point-to-point connection between two locations (e.g., Location 1 and
Location 4, Location 2 and Location 3, etc.).
LA
LA
LA
LA
LA
LA LA
LA
LA
LA
LA
LA
LA
LA
LA
LA
S
h
e
l
f

A

OptionaI 4-wire
inter-connect
cabIe (max 10m)
ONN
S
h
e
l
f

B

ONN
ONN
ONN ONN
ONN
ONN
C
C
E
P
CCEP
CCEP CCEP
CCEP
CCEP
CCEP CCSP
CCEP


36 A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
Technical Description (TED) System functions
Figure 12 User channels setup example
g The user channel is realized as a point-to-point VLAN without STP. Therefore, the
user channel must be used in a loop free configuration.
3.2.6 Telemetry Interface
The TIF sensors (inputs) and TIF actors (outputs) are intended to be used for traditional
user-defined housekeeping purposes.
The TIF sensors usually supervise particular events at the site (e.g., fire alarm, over-
temperature alarm, door-open alarm, etc.) and carry alarms issued by external equip-
ment (e.g., StrataLight OTS-4000 and MPBC RMH07 series). The TIF actors usually
control particular devices at the site (e.g., lights, air conditioning, etc.).
TIF sensors and actors are available on the first shelf (001) of the CCEP-1 controller
card with 16 sensors and 15 actors. Actors, 1 to 8, are free to be used by the user. The
remaining actors, 9 to 15, are used for equipment/communication alarm indication pur-
poses, visible and audible as listed in Table 9:
Optionally, actors 9 to 14 can be set for free usage by the user via LCT (see chapter
8.1). Actor 15 cannot be used by the user since it is totally driven by hardware.
The TIF sensors generate an environmental alarm on the NE, when the current state
differs from the configurable normal state.
ONN OLR ONN OLR ONN
User1 User2 User2
nternally through
connected
CCEP CCEP CCEP CCEP CCEP
User1 User2
n ONNs the user
channels are terminated
by default. A through
connect within the same
CCxP can be established
via the management
interface.
User1
Location 5 Location 1 Location 4 Location 2 Location 3
TIF actors Description
TIF actor 9 Critical Alarms (audible)
TIF actor 10 Major Alarms (audible)
TIF actor 11 Minor Alarms (audible)
TIF actor 12 Critical Alarms (visible)
TIF actor 13 Major Alarms (visible)
TIF actor 14 Minor Alarms (visible)
TIF actor 15 Power Equipment Alarm
Table 9 Default TIF actors functions


A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
37
Technical Description (TED) System functions
TIF circuits must be powered by circuits that meet Safety Extra Low Voltage (SELV)
limits according to Standards UL 1950, VDE 0100-410, and DIN EN 60950.
3.3 Performance management
The performance monitoring and signal quality analysis provide information for detect-
ing and alerting a cause that could lead to degraded performance before a failure is
declared.
In SURPASS hiT 7300, performance management provides the following monitoring
functions on transponder cards:
Performance monitoring (processing and reporting) of error parameters.
Inquiry of current, and history values of parameters.
Supervision of parameter thresholds and generation of Quality of Service (QoS)
alarms.
The system is capable of monitoring various performance parameters, e.g., CV, BBE,
ES, SES, SEFS, UAS, Avg-BER and Max-BER, on many layers in order to calculate the
transmission quality. Each transponder card accumulates its performance measure-
ments every 00, 15, 30, and 45 minutes within each hour.
For optical performance the OChm_TT layer also provides several performance param-
eters. In each transmission channel the system is capable of monitoring minPower,
maxPower, avgPower, number of powerScans, and LosCount parameters.
At the end of each 15-minute and/or 24-hour reporting period (configurable via LCT),
each card automatically reports its performance counts to the controller card.
3.4 Fault management
The fault management reports all hardware and software malfunctions within an NE and
monitors the integrity of all incoming and outgoing digital signals such as:
Detecting anomalies.
Deriving faults by eliminating spurious anomalies.
Triggering automatic maintenance actions.
Reducing alarms by correlation of defects and by adjustable persistence checks.
Time stamp events using the system real-time clock.
Issuing spontaneous alarm event notifications to the LCT.
Preventing the report of unwanted alarm event notifications according to config-
urable alarm forwarding.
Reporting alarms to the local alarm system.
Indicating fault states of replaceable units.
Storing alarm events and alarm states for later retrieval.
Supporting fault location for diagnosis and guiding of maintenance.
3.4.1 Alarms
All the alarms in SURPASS hiT 7300 are displayed in the TNMS/LCT software and in
the controller card alarm indication LEDs (see chapter 6.3.4). For a quick identification
of the type of alarm, the SURPASS hiT 7300 system provides several fault management
filters.


38 A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
Technical Description (TED) System functions
Alarm filtering
The fault management filtering comprises:
Anomalies and defects
Fault management starts with detection of anomalies and defects. An anomaly is the
smallest discrepancy that can be observed between:
The actual and the nominal characteristics of a signal (communication alarm
type).
The actual and nominal behavior of an equipment within the NE (equipment
alarm type).
The actual and nominal behavior of an external equipment monitored by sensors
via telemetry interfaces (equipment alarm type).
Consequent actions
After a defect detection, one or more consequent actions may be triggered, e.g.,
insertion of Forward Defect Indication (FDI) downstream, or, Backward Defect Indi-
cation (BDI) upstream.
Fault cause correlation
An anomaly can cause multiple defect detectors to be triggered. To determine which
of the detected defects is considered to represent the primary cause, the activated
defects are correlated to obtain a fault cause.
Alarm persistence time
A declared fault cause is checked for persistence generated failures. If the fault
cause remains active long enough to consider that the ability to perform a required
function no longer exists, a failure is declared.
Card LED
This filter activates the card indications related to the failure state. One LED (Fault
LED) in all "active" cards, i.e., those that contain an on-board processor, is respon-
sible for this indication.
Shelf/NE alarms
This filter activates the shelf or NE indications related to the equipment and commu-
nication alarms. Six LEDs (three for equipment and three for communication) on the
controller card are responsible for this indication.
TMN alarm forwarding
Each failure alarm is forwarded to the TMN software, e.g., TNMS Core/CDM.
SEV alarm severity assignment
Each failure is assigned with a severity:
Not Alarmed
Warning
Minor
Major
Critical
Alarm signals and LED indications
Various LED indications on the SURPASS hiT 7300 equipment allow physical localiza-
tion and a quick overview of raised alarms without the need of using any further equip-
ment or software.
Alarms generated by "active" cards, i.e., cards that contain a local card controller, are
created by the local controller card and displayed via the Fault LED on the front of the
card (see chapter 6.3.3). These alarms indicate an internal hardware failure or a pro-
cessing failure in the application software. In both cases this means that the card has a
defect and must be changed as soon as possible.


A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
39
Technical Description (TED) System functions
All shelf alarms are created by the controller card. These alarms are indicated by LEDs
on the controller card panel.
LCT alarm display
The detailed alarm information is displayed in the SURPASS hiT 7300 LCT software
(see chapter 8.1).
The LCT displays equipment and communication alarms on a configurable graphical
view, offering:
Current, and history of alarm lists with filter and sorting options.
Alarm name, severity, and state information.
Alarm acknowledge functions.
Alarm log available in the log section.
3.4.2 Alarm Indication Signal behavior
The Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) maintains transmission continuity and indicates to the
receiving equipment that a transmission interruption or defect has occurred at upstream
of that equipment (according to ITU-T G.709).
The AIS is implemented by the transponders since they interact directly with the client
equipment, therefore easing the fault detection.
When the transponder card does not receive a valid input signal, it sends out a mainte-
nance signal (AIS) at the corresponding output. Therefore:
a bad or no signal at client input results in an AIS at line output;
a bad or no signal at line input results in an AIS at client output.
The AIS signaling implemented by the transponder cards can be configured for the
SONET/SDH client interfaces (STM-16/OC-48 and STM-64/OC-192) as follows:
G-AIS (Generic AIS): uses a special pseudo-random sequence, therefore can be
used in several types of client interfaces.
MS-AIS (Multiplex Section AIS): is integrated in SDH framing, therefore can only be
used in SDH/SONET client interfaces.
Table 10 and Table 11 describe how the I04T2G5-1 transponder card implements AIS.
Condition at Client In
Resulting signal at Line Out
Layer Alarm
ETY3 LOS 10B_ERR + EOCI
ETY3/ETC3 SYNCF 10B_ERR
FC0 LOS 10BERR + EOCI
FC0/FC2 SYNCF 10B_ERR
OChr LOS ODU-AIS
OChr/OTU1 AIS ODU-AIS
OChr/OTU1 LOF ODU-AIS
OChr/OTU1 LOM ODU-AIS
Table 10 AIS implementation with I04T2G5-1 card,
Client In to Line Out direction


40 A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
Technical Description (TED) System functions
OS16 LOS (MS-AIS/G-AIS) + EOCI
OS16/CBR2G5 G-AIS MS-AIS/G-AIS
(user configurable)
OS16/RS16 LOF
MS-AIS/G-AIS
(user configurable)
OTU1 TIM
ODU-AIS
(user configurable)
Condition at Client In
Resulting signal at Line Out
Layer Alarm
Table 10 AIS implementation with I04T2G5-1 card,
Client In to Line Out direction (Cont.)
Condition at Line In Resulting signal at Client Out
Layer Alarm GbE STM-16/OC-48 OTU1 FC/FICON
OChr LOS-P
/V/-Code/LaserOff
(user configurable)
MS-AIS/G-AIS
(user configurable)
ODU-AIS
/V/-Code/LaserOff
(user configurable)
OChr/OTU1 AIS
/V/-Code/LaserOff
(user configurable)
MS-AIS/G-AIS
(user configurable)
ODU-AIS
/V/-Code/LaserOff
(user configurable)
OChr/OTU1 LOF
/V/-Code/LaserOff
(user configurable)
MS-AIS/G-AIS
(user configurable)
ODU-AIS
/V/-Code/LaserOff
(user configurable)
OChr/OTU1 LOM
/V/-Code/LaserOff
(user configurable)
MS-AIS/G-AIS
(user configurable)
ODU-AIS
/V/-Code/LaserOff
(user configurable)
OTU1 TIM
/V/-Code/LaserOff
(user configurable)
MS-AIS/G-AIS
(user configurable)
ODU-AIS
(user configurable)
/V/-Code/LaserOff
(user configurable)
ODU1T AIS
/V/-Code/LaserOff
(user configurable)
MS-AIS/G-AIS
(user configurable)
ODU-AIS
/V/-Code/LaserOff
(user configurable)
ODU1T LTC
/V/-Code/LaserOff
(user configurable)
MS-AIS/G-AIS
(user configurable)
ODU-AIS
/V/-Code/LaserOff
(user configurable)
ODU1T LCK
/V/-Code/LaserOff
(user configurable)
MS-AIS/G-AIS
(user configurable)
ODU-AIS
/V/-Code/LaserOff
(user configurable)
ODU1T OCI
/V/-Code/LaserOff
(user configurable)
MS-AIS/G-AIS
(user configurable)
ODU-AIS
/V/-Code/LaserOff
(user configurable)
ODU1T TIM
/V/-Code/LaserOff
(user configurable)
MS-AIS/G-AIS
(user configurable)
ODU-AIS
(user configurable)
/V/-Code/LaserOff
(user configurable)
ODU1P AIS
/V/-Code/LaserOff
(user configurable)
MS-AIS/G-AIS
(user configurable)
-
/V/-Code/LaserOff
(user configurable)
ODU1P LCK
/V/-Code/LaserOff
(user configurable)
MS-AIS/G-AIS
(user configurable)
-
/V/-Code/LaserOff
(user configurable)
Table 11 AIS implementation with I04T2G5-1 card,
Line In to Client Out direction


A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
41
Technical Description (TED) System functions
Table 12 and Table 13 describe how the I01T10G-1 transponder card implements AIS.
ODU1P OCI
/V/-Code/LaserOff
(user configurable)
MS-AIS/G-AIS
(user configurable)
-
/V/-Code/LaserOff
(user configurable)
ODU1P TIM
/V/-Code/LaserOff
(user configurable)
MS-AIS/G-AIS
(user configurable)
-
/V/-Code/LaserOff
(user configurable)
ODU1P/
CBR2G5
EOCI -
LaserOff
(user configurable)
- -
ODU1P/
CBR2G5
PLM
GbE/LaserOff
(user configurable)
MS-AIS/G-AIS
(user configurable)
- -
ODU1P/
CBR2G5
G-AIS
GbE/LaserOff
(user configurable)
MS-AIS/G-AIS
(user configurable)
- -
ODU1P/RS16 LOF -
MS-AIS/G-AIS
(user configurable)
- -
ODU1P/ETC
3
EOCI
LaserOff
(user configurable)
- - -
ODU1P/ETC
3
PLM
/V/-Code/LaserOff
(user configurable)
- - -
ODU1P/ETC
3
LFD
/V/-Code/LaserOff
(user configurable)
- - -
ODU1P/ETC
3
UPM
/V/-Code/LaserOff
(user configurable)
- - -
ODU1P/ETC
3
10BERR
/V/-Code/LaserOff
(user configurable)
- - -
ODU1P/ETC
3
SYNCF-
egress
/V/-Code/LaserOff
(user configurable)
- - -
ODU1P/FC2 EOCI - - -
LaserOff
(user configurable)
ODU1P/FC2 PLM - - -
/V/-Code/LaserOff
(user configurable)
ODU1P/FC2 LFD - - -
/V/-Code/LaserOff
(user configurable)
ODU1P/FC2 UPM - - -
/V/-Code/LaserOff
(user configurable)
ODU1P/FC2 10BERR - - -
/V/-Code/LaserOff
(user configurable)
ODU1P/FC2
SYNCF-
egress
- - -
/V/-Code/LaserOff
(user configurable)
Condition at Line In Resulting signal at Client Out
Layer Alarm GbE STM-16/OC-48 OTU1 FC/FICON
Table 11 AIS implementation with I04T2G5-1 card,
Line In to Client Out direction (Cont.)


42 A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
Technical Description (TED) System functions
Condition at Client In
Resulting signal at Line Out
Layer Alarm
ETY4 LOS G-AIS + EOCI
ETY4/CBR10G G-AIS G-AIS
OChr LOS ODU-AIS
OChr/OTU2 AIS ODU-AIS
OChr/OTU2 LOF ODU-AIS
OChr/OTU2 LOM ODU-AIS
OTU2 TIM ODU-AIS
OS64 LOS
(MS-AIS/G-AIS) + EOCI
(user configurable)
OS64/CBR10G G-AIS MS-AIS/G-AIS
(user configurable)
OS64/RS64 LOF
MS-AIS/G-AIS
(user configurable)
Table 12 AIS implementation with I01T10G-1 card,
Client In to Line Out direction
Condition at Line In Resulting signal at Client Out
Layer Alarm 10GbE STM-64/OC-192 OTU2
OChr LOS-P
G-AIS/LaserOff
(user configurable)
MS-AIS/G-AIS
(user configurable)
G-AIS
OChr/OTU2V AIS
G-AIS/LaserOff
(user configurable)
MS-AIS/G-AIS
(user configurable)
G-AIS
OChr/OTU2V LOF
G-AIS/LaserOff
(user configurable)
MS-AIS/G-AIS
(user configurable)
G-AIS
OChr/OTU2V LOM
G-AIS/LaserOff
(user configurable)
MS-AIS/G-AIS
(user configurable)
G-AIS
OTU2V TIM
G-AIS/LaserOff
(user configurable)
MS-AIS/G-AIS
(user configurable)
G-AIS
(user configurable)
ODU2T AIS
G-AIS/LaserOff
(user configurable)
MS-AIS/G-AIS
(user configurable)
G-AIS
ODU2T LTC
G-AIS/LaserOff
(user configurable)
MS-AIS/G-AIS
(user configurable)
G-AIS
ODU2T LCK
G-AIS/LaserOff
(user configurable)
MS-AIS/G-AIS
(user configurable)
G-AIS
Table 13 AIS implementation with I01T10G-1 card,
Line In to Client Out direction


A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
43
Technical Description (TED) System functions
Table 14 and Table 15 describe how the I08T10G-1 transponder card implements AIS.
ODU2T OCI
G-AIS/LaserOff
(user configurable)
MS-AIS/G-AIS
(user configurable)
G-AIS
ODU2T TIM
G-AIS/LaserOff
(user configurable)
MS-AIS/G-AIS
(user configurable)
G-AIS
(user configurable)
ODU2P AIS
G-AIS/LaserOff
(user configurable)
MS-AIS/G-AIS
(user configurable)
G-AIS
ODU2P LCK
G-AIS/LaserOff
(user configurable)
MS-AIS/G-AIS
(user configurable)
G-AIS
ODU2P OCI
G-AIS/LaserOff
(user configurable)
MS-AIS/G-AIS
(user configurable)
G-AIS
ODU2P TIM
G-AIS/LaserOff
(user configurable)
MS-AIS/G-AIS
(user configurable)
G-AIS
(user configurable)
ODU2P/CBR10G EOCI
LaserOff
(user configurable)
LaserOff
(user configurable)
-
ODU2P/CBR10G PLM
G-AIS/LaserOff
(user configurable)
MS-AIS/G-AIS
(user configurable)
G-AIS
ODU2P/CBR10G G-AIS G-AIS/LaserOff
(user configurable)
G-AIS G-AIS
ODU2P/ETC4 SYNCF G-AIS/LaserOff
(user configurable)
- G-AIS
ODU2P/RS64 LOF -
MS-AIS/G-AIS
(user configurable)
G-AIS
Condition at Line In Resulting signal at Client Out
Layer Alarm 10GbE STM-64/OC-192 OTU2
Table 13 AIS implementation with I01T10G-1 card,
Line In to Client Out direction (Cont.)
Condition at Client In
Resulting signal at Line Out
Layer Alarm
ETY3 LOS 10B_ERR + EOCI
ETY3/ETC3 SYNCF 10B_ERR
OChr LOS ODU-AIS
OChr/OTU1 AIS ODU-AIS
OChr/OTU1 LOF ODU-AIS
OChr/OTU1 LOM ODU-AIS
OS16 LOS (MS-AIS/G-AIS) + EOCI
Table 14 AIS implementation with I08T10G-1 card,
Client In to Line Out direction


44 A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
Technical Description (TED) System functions
OS16/CBR2G5 G-AIS MS-AIS/G-AIS
(user configurable)
OS16/RS16 LOF
MS-AIS/G-AIS
(user configurable)
OTU1 TIM
ODU-AIS
(user configurable)
Condition at Client In
Resulting signal at Line Out
Layer Alarm
Table 14 AIS implementation with I08T10G-1 card,
Client In to Line Out direction (Cont.)
Condition at Line In Resulting signal at Client Out
Layer Alarm GbE STM-16/OC-48 OTU1
OChr LOS-P
/V/-Code/LaserOff
(user configurable)
MS-AIS/G-AIS
(user configurable)
ODU-AIS
OChr/OTU2V AIS
/V/-Code/LaserOff
(user configurable)
MS-AIS/G-AIS
(user configurable)
ODU-AIS
OChr/OTU2V LOF
/V/-Code/LaserOff
(user configurable)
MS-AIS/G-AIS
(user configurable)
ODU-AIS
OChr/OTU2V LOM
/V/-Code/LaserOff
(user configurable)
MS-AIS/G-AIS
(user configurable)
ODU-AIS
OTU2V TIM
/V/-Code/LaserOff
(user configurable)
MS-AIS/G-AIS
(user configurable)
ODU-AIS
ODU2T AIS
/V/-Code/LaserOff
(user configurable)
MS-AIS/G-AIS
(user configurable)
ODU-AIS
(user configurable)
ODU2T LTC
/V/-Code/LaserOff
(user configurable)
MS-AIS/G-AIS
(user configurable)
ODU-AIS
(user configurable)
ODU2T LCK
/V/-Code/LaserOff
(user configurable)
MS-AIS/G-AIS
(user configurable)
ODU-AIS
(user configurable)
ODU2T OCI
/V/-Code/LaserOff
(user configurable)
MS-AIS/G-AIS
(user configurable)
ODU-AIS
(user configurable)
ODU2T TIM
/V/-Code/LaserOff
(user configurable)
MS-AIS/G-AIS
(user configurable)
ODU-AIS
(user configurable)
ODU2P AIS
/V/-Code/LaserOff
(user configurable)
MS-AIS/G-AIS
(user configurable)
ODU-AIS
ODU2P LCK
/V/-Code/LaserOff
(user configurable)
MS-AIS/G-AIS
(user configurable)
ODU-AIS
ODU2P OCI
/V/-Code/LaserOff
(user configurable)
MS-AIS/G-AIS
(user configurable)
ODU-AIS
Table 15 AIS implementation with I08T10G-1 card,
Line In to Client Out direction


A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
45
Technical Description (TED) System functions
ODU2P TIM
/V/-Code/LaserOff
(user configurable)
MS-AIS/G-AIS
(user configurable)
ODU-AIS
(user configurable)
ODU2P/ODU1 PLM
/V/-Code/LaserOff
(user configurable)
MS-AIS/G-AIS
(user configurable)
ODU-AIS
ODU2P/ODU1 LOFLOM
/V/-Code/LaserOff
(user configurable)
MS-AIS/G-AIS
(user configurable)
ODU-AIS
ODU1T AIS
/V/-Code/LaserOff
(user configurable)
MS-AIS/G-AIS
(user configurable)
ODU-AIS
(user configurable)
ODU1T LTC
/V/-Code/LaserOff
(user configurable)
MS-AIS/G-AIS
(user configurable)
ODU-AIS
(user configurable)
ODU1T LCK
/V/-Code/LaserOff
(user configurable)
MS-AIS/G-AIS
(user configurable)
ODU-AIS
(user configurable)
ODU1T OCI
/V/-Code/LaserOff
(user configurable)
MS-AIS/G-AIS
(user configurable)
ODU-AIS
(user configurable)
ODU1T TIM
/V/-Code/LaserOff
(user configurable)
MS-AIS/G-AIS
(user configurable)
ODU-AIS
(user configurable)
ODU1P AIS
/V/-Code/LaserOff
(user configurable)
MS-AIS/G-AIS
(user configurable)
-
ODU1P LCK
/V/-Code/LaserOff
(user configurable)
MS-AIS/G-AIS
(user configurable)
-
ODU1P OCI
/V/-Code/LaserOff
(user configurable)
MS-AIS/G-AIS
(user configurable)
-
ODU1P TIM
/V/-Code/LaserOff
(user configurable)
MS-AIS/G-AIS
(user configurable)
-
ODU1P/CBR2G5 EOCI -
LaserOff
(user configurable)
-
ODU1P/CBR2G5 PLM -
MS-AIS/G-AIS
(user configurable)
-
ODU1P/CBR2G5 G-AIS - G-AIS -
ODU1P/ETC3 EOCI
LaserOff
(user configurable)
- -
ODU1P/ETC3 PLM
/V/-Code/LaserOff
(user configurable)
- -
ODU1P/ETC3
LFD
/V/-Code/LaserOff
(user configurable)
- -
ODU1P/ETC3
UPM
/V/-Code/LaserOff
(user configurable)
- -
Condition at Line In Resulting signal at Client Out
Layer Alarm GbE STM-16/OC-48 OTU1
Table 15 AIS implementation with I08T10G-1 card,
Line In to Client Out direction (Cont.)


46 A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
Technical Description (TED) System functions
g All the resulting signals marked as user configurable on Table 10, Table 11, Table
12, Table 13, Table 14 and Table 15 can be configured by the user via LCT.
3.5 Loopback behavior
The following sub-chapters describe the loopback behavior provided by the SURPASS
hiT 7300 transponders.
Loopbacks are diagnostic tests that can be activated via LCT. Loopbacks return the
transmitted signal back to the sending device after the signal has passed across a par-
ticular link. The returned signal can then be compared to the transmitted one. The dis-
crepancy between the transmitted and the returned signal helps to trace the fault.
3.5.1 I04T2G5-1 loopback
Figure 13 displays the I04T2G5-1 card loopback behavior.
Figure 13 I04T2G5-1 loopback
3.5.2 I01T10G-1 loopback
Figure 14 displays the I01TG10-1 card loopback behavior.
ODU1P/ETC3 SYNCF-
egress
/V/-Code/LaserOff
(user configurable)
- -
ODU1P/ETC3
10BERR
/V/-Code/LaserOff
(user configurable)
- -
Condition at Line In Resulting signal at Client Out
Layer Alarm GbE STM-16/OC-48 OTU1
Table 15 AIS implementation with I08T10G-1 card,
Line In to Client Out direction (Cont.)
Client
nterface
mapping
Line Out 2
Line n 2
Client n 3
Client Out 3
Line
nterface
mapping
Client
nterface
mapping
Client n 1
Client Out 1
Line
nterface
mapping
Line Out 1
Line n 1
Serializer/
Deserializer
Serializer/
Deserializer
Serializer/
Deserializer
Serializer/
Deserializer
Serializer/
Deserializer
Serializer/
Deserializer
Client n 2
Client Out 2
Client n 4
Client Out 4


A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
47
Technical Description (TED) System functions
Figure 14 I01TG10-1 loopback
3.5.3 I08T10G-1 loopback
Figure 15 displays the I08TG10-1 card loopback behavior.
Figure 15 I08TG10-1 loopback
For detailed information about SURPASS hiT 7300 transponders, please refer to
chapter 5.12.
Serializer/
Deserializer
Client Out
Client n
Line Out
Line n
Client
nterface
mapping
Line
nterface
mapping
Serializer/
Deserializer
Client
nterface
mapping
Line
nterface
mapping
Serializer/
Deserializer
Client Out 1
Client n 1
Line Out
Line n
Serializer/
Deserializer
Serializer/
Deserializer
Client Out 2
Client n 2
Serializer/
Deserializer
Client Out 3
Client n 3
Serializer/
Deserializer
Client Out 4
Client n 4
Serializer/
Deserializer
Client Out 5
Client n 5
Serializer/
Deserializer
Client Out 6
Client n 6
Serializer/
Deserializer
Client Out 7
Client n 7
Serializer/
Deserializer
Client Out 8
Client n 8


48 A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
Technical Description (TED) Network Elements
4 Network Elements
This chapter describes the available NEs of SURPASS hiT 7300.
For information regarding the SURPASS hiT 7300 supported cards, see chapter 5.
Table 16 lists all the available NEs in a SURPASS hiT 7300 Optical Transport Network
(OTN).
The OTN is composed by one or more optical paths. A maximum of 40 channels can be
transmitted in one optical fiber along one optical path. An optical path comprises several
sections, as displayed in Figure 16.
NE Subtype Description
OLR
(see chapter 4.1)
-
Used for optical signal amplification with
dispersion compensation.
Terminates 2 OTS.
ONN
(see chapter 4.2)
ONN-T
Optical termination node for realization of
Terminal 1/2 OADM.
Used for amplification, dispersion compensation
full add/drop within an optical path.
Terminates 1 Optical Multiplex Section (OMS).
ONN-I
Optical interconnection node for realization of
FullAccess OADM or Flexible OADM.
Used for amplification, dispersion compensation
and full add/drop.
Terminates up to 6 OMSs.
ONN-R
Optical interconnection node for realization of
FullAccess OADM or Reconfigurable OADM
(ROADM).
Used for amplification, dispersion compensation
and partial or full add/drop.
Terminates up to 6 OMSs.
ONN-S
Optical interconnection node for realization of
Small OADM.
Used for amplification, dispersion compensation
and partial add/drop within an OMS.
SON
(see chapter 4.3)
-
Used for:
Passive optical multiplexing/demultiplexing
optionally combined with transponder
application.
Pure transponder application.
Long single span transmission by inter-
working with RMH07 series from MPBC.
Table 16 SURPASS hiT 7300 NEs


A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
49
Technical Description (TED) Network Elements
Figure 16 Optical path sections example
g In Figure 16 example, all traffic is sent from ONN-T to ONN-T, therefore comprising
one single optical path.
NE equipment configuration
All the NEs support up to 15 shelves. The maximum number of transponder cards rec-
ommended for all NE types is 100 I04T2G5-1 or I08T10G-1 cards, or 200 I01T10G-1
cards. For NEs that require more than 100/200 transponder cards, please contact your
Nokia Siemens Networks sales representative before planning or upgrading.
4.1 Optical Line Repeater
The OLR is a DWDM NE which supports:
The following card types:
Controller cards.
Inline amplifier cards.
External pump cards.
Dispersion compensation module cards.
Raman amplification together with one line amplifier card.
Two bidirectional OSC terminations within a single shelf.
Power reduction to class 1M (APSD) for laser safety on line, with and without
Raman amplification.
The OLR is used for amplification, channel power boost, power tilt adjustment and dis-
persion compensation, in a single-shelf realization, even when Raman pump cards are
required (see Figure 17).
ONN-/R OLR ONN-T ONN-S
Optical Path
OMS OMS OMS
OTS OTS OTS OTS
ONN-T


50 A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
Technical Description (TED) Network Elements
Figure 17 OLR structure example
4.2 Optical Network Node
The ONN NE has four subtypes of NEs as described in Table 16. Each subtype has a
specific function within a DWDM network (see chapters 4.2.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.3 and 4.2.4).
They support:
The following card types:
Controller cards.
Line amplifier cards with booster and pre-amplifier capabilities.
Filter cards.
Channel power monitor card.
Dispersion compensation module cards.
Transponder cards.
Optical channel protection card
Raman amplification together with one line amplifier card.
Nodal degree of 1 (supported by ONN-T subtype NE) up to 6 (supported by the
ONN-I/R subtypes only) with a maximum of 6 bidirectional OSC terminations. An
upgrade of a lower to higher nodal degree is possible without traffic impact. Two bidi-
rectional OSCs are terminated within one shelf. An additional shelf is needed for the
next two additional OSC terminations.
Link control termination for all terminated OMSs.
Power reduction to class 1M for laser safety on line (APSD) and inside the NE
(APRM), with and without Raman amplification.
g The ONN NE subtype definition is done via Network Element Configuration File
(NCF).
By combining only four basic filter card types, the SURPASS hiT 7300 system can cover
all practical network applications therefore, offering a great simplicity to the network
planning and an ability to grow the network over the time.
The four basic filter card types (F04MDN-1, F04MDU-1, F08SB-1 and F16SB-1) provide
to the ONN-T and ONN-I a Flexible OADM architecture with EOL capacity of 4 to 40
channels in steps of 4 channels.
For FullAccess OADM architectures, the ONN-R NEs can use one of the two filter cards
(F40-1 and F40MR-1), specially designed for a full add/drop of 40 channels.
(optional)
(optional) (optional)
DCM Pump
nline amplifier
DCM Pump
Raman
pump
(optional)
Raman
pump
(optional) (optional)
nline amplifier


A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
51
Technical Description (TED) Network Elements
Based on the necessary EOL optical channel count number of a DWDM network, cost
optimized filter structures are offered for optical channel multiplexing/demultiplexing
(see chapter 5.7).
The most characteristic EOL counts are distinguished in Table 17
Each filter structure allows an upgrade path from provisioning of the first optical channel
(BOL) up to the last optical channel (EOL) without any traffic interruption.
The filter structures can be applied for each DWDM line interface of a multi-degree ONN.
A special case is the ONN-S (Small OADM) which only uses a very simple filter structure
(see Figure 26).
Flexible filter structure for EOL=12
Figure 18 displays the filter structure for EOL=12 with the upgrade path from the first
channel (group) to the last channel (group). The three 4-channel sub-bands (Cxx) are
located within the flat region of the optical amplifier band. The upgrade path allows any
upgrade order for three 4-channel sub-bands.
Figure 18 Flexible filter structure for EOL=12
Flexible filter structure for EOL=20
Figure 19 displays the basic filter structure for EOL=20 with the upgrade path from the
first channel (group) to the last channel (group). The upgrade path allows any upgrade
order for these sub-bands.
There are two subtypes for this filter structure, depending on which sub-band is
added/dropped as the first sub-band (C07 or C08). The cards required for add/drop or
through-connection of the corresponding wavelengths, are necessary within the filter
tree.
For more than 4 channels of BOL configuration, the F08SB-1 card with the red/blue
band splitter is required.
ONN realization
EOL count OADM architecture
EOL=12 EOL=20 EOL=32 EOL=40
Terminal
1/2 OADM
Flexible
OADM
FullAccess
OADM
ONN-T X X X X X
ONN-I X X X X X X
ONN-R X X
Table 17 EOL counts overview
LAxP
pre-amp
LAxB
booster
Cz
F04MDU-1
(C05, C06, C08)
i j l k
F04MDN-1
(C05, C06, C08)
i j l k
Cx Cy
F04MDU-1
(C05, C06, C08)
i j l k
DWDM
line
3rd channel group 2nd channel group 1st channel group


52 A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
Technical Description (TED) Network Elements
Figure 19 Flexible filter structure for EOL=20
Flexible filter structure for EOL=32
Figure 20 displays the basic filter structure for EOL=32 with the upgrade path from the
first channel (group) to the last channel (group). The upgrade path allows any upgrade
order for these sub-bands.
There are three subtypes for this filter structure, depending on which sub-band is
added/dropped as the first (C07 or C08 or C09). The cards required for add/drop or
through-connection of the corresponding wavelengths, are necessary within the filter
tree.
For more than 4 channels of BOL configuration, the F08SB-1 card with the red/blue
band splitter is required. Between 12 to 24 channels, a F08SB-1 and one F16SB-1 (red
or blue) sub-band filter cards are required. Up to 32 channels, a F08SB-1 and two
F16SB-1 (red and blue) sub-band filter cards are required.
LAxP
pre-amp
LAxB
booster
DWDM
line
F08SB-1
C01, C02,
C03, C04
C07, C08,
C09, C10
C05
C06
F04MDN-1
(C06)
i j l k
F04MDN-1
(C05)
i j l k
F04MDN-1
(C07 or C08)
i j l k
F04MDN-1
(C04)
i j l k
F04MDU-1
(C07 or C08)
i j l k


A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
53
Technical Description (TED) Network Elements
Figure 20 Flexible filter structure for EOL=32
Flexible filter structure for EOL=40
Figure 21 displays the basic filter structure for EOL=40 with the upgrade path from the
first channel (group) to the last channel (group). The upgrade path allows any upgrade
order for these sub-bands. The cards required for add/drop or through-connection of the
corresponding wavelengths, are necessary within the filter tree.
The F08SB-1 card with the red/blue band splitter is always required. Between 12 to 24
channels, one F16SB-1 (red or blue) sub-band filter card is required. Up to 40 channels,
a F08SB-1 and two F16SB-1 (red and blue) sub-band filter cards are required.
LAxP
pre-amp
LAxB
booster
D
W
D
M

l
i
n
e
F08SB-1
C01, C02,
C03, C04
C07, C08,
C09, C10
C05
C06
F04MDN-1
(C06)
i j l k
F04MDN-1
(C05)
i j l k
F04MDU-1
(C07 or C08)
i j l k
F16SB-1 (red)
C07
C08
C09
C10
F04MDN-1
(C08 or C09)
i j l k
F04MDN-1
(C10)
i j l k
F04MDN-1
(C07 or C08)
i j l k
F04MDN-1
(C03)
i j l k
F16SB-1 (blue)
C01
C02
C03
C04
F04MDN-1
(C04)
i j l k


54 A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
Technical Description (TED) Network Elements
Figure 21 Flexible filter structure for EOL=40
Full access filter structure
Figure 22 displays the basic filter structure for a EOL=40 in a FullAccess OADM archi-
tecture by using a F40-1 filter card. Two F40-1 filter cards (one for each transmission
direction) allow a full add/drop of 40 channels without the need of additional filter cards.
LAxP
pre-amp
LAxB
booster
D
W
D
M

l
i
n
e
F08SB-1
C01, C02,
C03, C04
C07, C08,
C09, C10
C05
C06
F04MDN-1
(C06)
i j l k
F04MDN-1
(C05)
i j l k
F16SB-1 (blue)
C01
C02
C03
C04
F04MDN-1
(C07)
i j l k
F04MDN-1
(C08)
i j l k
F04MDN-1
(C09)
i j l k
F04MDN-1
(C10)
i j l k
F16SB-1 (red)
C07
C08
C09
C10
F04MDN-1
(C01)
i j l k
F04MDN-1
(C02)
i j l k
F04MDN-1
(C03)
i j l k
F04MDN-1
(C04)
i j l k


A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
55
Technical Description (TED) Network Elements
Figure 22 Full access filter structure using F40-1 cards
g The same realization can be obtained by using one F40MR-1 card (e.g., to add
channels) and one F40-1 card (e.g., to drop channels).
The following sub-chapters will describe the ONN subtypes.
4.2.1 Optical Network Node - Terminal
The ONN-T is a DWDM NE which can be used in a Terminal 1/2 OADM architecture. It
multiplexes and demultiplexes all channels, and terminates 1 OMS of the DWDM trans-
port network (see Figure 23).
Figure 23 ONN-T structure example
Multiplexer Card
F40-1
1
9
2
.
1

.
.
.

1
9
6
.
0

T
H
z
.
.
.

1
2
4
0
Demultiplexer Card
F40-1
1
9
2
.
1

.
.
.

1
9
6
.
0

T
H
z
.
.
.

1
2
4
0
LAxP
pre-amp
DWDM line
LAxB
booster
Optical
MUX/DMUX
cards
2.5G
2.5G
10G
10G
Transponder
cards
Optical
Attenuator
cards
Optical Amplifier, DCM, optional cards
(optional)
(optional) (optional)
DCM Pump
Booster
DCM Pump
Raman
pump
M
C
P
4
0
4
O
S
A
(
o
p
t
i
o
n
a
l
)
Pre-amplifier
(optional)


56 A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
Technical Description (TED) Network Elements
The ONN-T is used instead of a ONN-I (with F08SB-1, F16SB-1/x, F04MDU-1/x,
F04MDN-1/x cards) or ONN-R (with F40-1 card pair) when a terminal network node
needs a wider pre-emphasis section than the ONN-I or ONN-R provides, and intercon-
nection of transparent optical paths is not required.
4.2.2 Optical Network Node - Interconnect
The ONN-I is a DWDM NE which supports a nodal degree up to 6 in a Flexible OADM
architecture. It is used for amplification, dispersion compensation, termination of OMSs
(maximum of six) and also includes transponders for termination of optical channels
(see Figure 24).
Figure 24 ONN-I structure example
The ONN-I is composed of one (or more) OMS termination(s), for multiplexing and
demultiplexing of optical channels. Every transmission direction of the ONN-I terminates
the respective OMS.
Channels that are dropped at an ONN-I are terminated at the client equipment.
4.2.3 Optical Network Node - Reconfigurable
The ONN-R is a DWDM NE which supports a nodal degree up to 6. The ONN-R can be
used in FullAccess OADM, or a ROADM architectures by combining the functions of
optical channel multiplexing/demultiplexing and optical channel (wavelengths) switching
to a very compact solution of a (remotely) reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexer
with 100% access to all 40 optical channels on a DWDM line interface (see Figure 25).
Optical
MUX/DMUX
cards
2
.
5
G
2
.
5
G
1
0
G
1
0
G
T
r
a
n
s
p
o
n
d
e
r

c
a
r
d
s
Optical
Attenuator
cards
Optical
MUX/DMUX
cards
Optical Amplifier, DCM, optional cards
(optional)
Booster
Raman
pump
M
C
P
4
0
4
O
S
A
(
o
p
t
i
o
n
a
l
)
Pre-amplifier
(optional) (optional)
DCM Pump
DCM Pump
(optional)
Optical Amplifier, DCM, optional cards
(optional)
(optional) (optional)
DCM Pump
Booster
DCM Pump
Raman
pump
M
C
P
4
0
4
O
S
A
(
o
p
t
i
o
n
a
l
)
Pre-amplifier
(optional)


A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
57
Technical Description (TED) Network Elements
Figure 25 ONN-R structure example
Any OTN using ONN-R NEs provides a dynamic wavelength provisioning across the
DWDM network, therefore, allowing a modification of the customer traffic demands
without manual equipment installation at intermediate locations by local field service
personnel (Opex reduction).
Additionally, the ONN-R provides a simplified optical cabling when compared to a con-
ventional ONN, due to the greatly reduced number of optical patch-cords for express
traffic, therefore avoiding any erroneous fiber disconnections in case of manual installa-
tion changes.
4.2.4 Optical Network Node - Small
The ONN-S is a DWDM NE with nodal degree 2 in a Small OADM architecture. It is used
for amplification and link start-up of add/drop channels within an optical path (see Figure
26).
Optical Amplifier, DCM, optional cards
(optional)
(optional) (optional)
DCM Pump
Booster
DCM Pump
Raman
pump
M
C
P
4
0
4
O
S
A
(
o
p
t
i
o
n
a
l
)
Pre-amplifier
(optional)
Optical Amplifier, DCM, optional cards
(optional)
Booster
Raman
pump
M
C
P
4
0
4
O
S
A
(
o
p
t
i
o
n
a
l
)
Pre-amplifier
(optional) (optional)
(optional)
O
p
t
i
c
a
l

A
m
p
l
i
f
i
e
r
,

D
C
M
,

o
p
t
i
o
n
a
l

c
a
r
d
s
(
o
p
t
i
o
n
a
l
)
B
o
o
s
t
e
r
R
a
m
a
n
p
u
m
p
MCP404
OSA
(optional)
P
r
e
-
a
m
p
l
i
f
i
e
r
(
o
p
t
i
o
n
a
l
)
(
o
p
t
i
o
n
a
l
)
D
C
M
P
u
m
p
D
C
M
P
u
m
p
(
o
p
t
i
o
n
a
l
)
Optical
MUX/DMUX/ROADM
cards
express
DWDM traffic
express
DWDM traffic
local
drop
F40
...
F40
...
F40
...
F40
...
local
add
local
add
local
drop
local
add
local
drop
F40MR F40MR
i
i
DCM Pump
DCM Pump


58 A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
Technical Description (TED) Network Elements
Figure 26 ONN-S structure example
The ONN-S has a maximum add/drop capacity of 8 channels. Channels that are
dropped at an ONN-S are terminated at the client equipment.
4.3 Standalone Optical Node
The SON is a DWDM NE that can be used in passive DWDM (e.g., point-to-point and
remote transponder solutions) and long single span applications.
Any SON NE supports flexible filter structures which includes a cascade of F04MDU-1
filters cards (allowing incremental upgrades in steps of 4-channels) optionally termi-
nated by an F04MDN-1 filter card. Alternatively the F08SB-1 filter card as red/blue
splitter can be used to provide a lower insertion loss with higher number of channels
(see Figure 27).
2
.
5
G
2
.
5
G
1
0
G
1
0
G
T
r
a
n
s
p
o
n
d
e
r

c
a
r
d
s
O
p
t
i
c
a
l
A
t
t
e
n
u
a
t
o
r

c
a
r
d
s
Optical Amplifier, DCM, optional cards
(optional)
Booster
Raman
pump
Pre-amplifier
(optional) (optional)
(optional)
Optical MUX/DMUX cards
up to 2x4 channels add/drop
to/from direction 1
subband x subband x subband y subband y
up to 2x4 channels add/drop
to/from direction 2
local
add/drop
local
add/drop
DCM Pump
DCM Pump
Optical Amplifier, DCM, optional cards
(optional)
(optional) (optional)
DCM Pump
Booster
DCM Pump
Raman
pump
Pre-amplifier
(optional)


A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
59
Technical Description (TED) Network Elements
Figure 27 SON flexible filter structure for passive DWDM (EOL=40)
The filter structure for a passive SON terminal can be realized by flexible filter structure
(depending on the required number of channels), or by the F40-1 filter cards providing
access to all 40 channels.
Two F40-1 filter cards can be used leading to a very compact solution with low insertion
loss (see Figure 28).
DWDM line
F08SB-1
C01, C02,
C03, C04
C07, C08,
C09, C10
C05
C06
F04MDN-1
(C06)
i j l k
F04MDN-1
i j l k
F04MDN-1
i j l k
F04MDU-1
i j l k
F04MDU-1
i j l k
F04MDN-1
(C05)
i j l k


60 A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
Technical Description (TED) Network Elements
Figure 28 Passive SON terminal filter structure with F40-1 filter cards (EOL=40)
g Applications with SON must be planned and commissioned by a simple planning
tool for passive DWDM or long single span applications.
4.3.1 Passive DWDM applications
In passive DWDM applications the SON supports the following cards:
All the defined types of controller cards.
F04MDN-1, F04MDU-1, F08SB-1 and F40-1 filter cards.
O08VA-1 variable optical attenuator card.
Dispersion Compensation Module (DCM) cards using FBG.
All the defined types of transponder cards.
O03CP-1 optical channel protection card.
The SON can be used for a passive multiplexing/demultiplexing combined with a tran-
sponder application, i.e., no amplification or attenuation is performed (see Figure 29).
Figure 29 SON structure example
Multiplexer Card
F40-1
1
9
2
.
1

.
.
.

1
9
6
.
0

T
H
z
.
.
.

1
2
4
0
Demultiplexer Card
F40-1
1
9
2
.
1

.
.
.

1
9
6
.
0

T
H
z
.
.
.

1
2
4
0
DWDM line
SON
(passive terminal)
2.5G
2.5G
10G
Transponder
cards
Optical
MUX/DMUX
cards
2.5G
2.5G
10G
Transponder
cards
SON
(passive terminal)
Optical
MUX/DMUX
cards
SON
(passive OADM)
2
.
5
G
2
.
5
G
1
0
G
T
r
a
n
s
p
o
n
d
e
r

c
a
r
d
s

Optical
MUX/DMUX
cards
Optical
MUX/DMUX
cards


A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
61
Technical Description (TED) Network Elements
For simple point-to-point applications, a passive SON terminal allows the following dis-
tances over a G.652 fiber with the SURPASS hiT 7300 transponder cards:
Up to 60 km for 40 optical 2.5 Gbit/s channels (70 km with an F40-1 filter card).
Up to 100 km for 28 optical 2.5 Gbit/s channels.
Up to 18 km for 12 optical 10 Gbit/s channels.
Up to 25 km for 8 optical 10 Gbit/s channels.
The exact reach depends on the number of multiplexed channels due to optical filters
insertion loss. The reach has to be calculated according to the network application.
4.3.2 Long single span applications
The long single span transmission is achieved by interworking of SON and RMH07
series equipment from MPB Communications for fiber spans using SSMF or PSCF.
Only point-to-point architectures without optical regenerator sites are supported.
In a long single span architecture the following equipment is supported by the SON:
All the defined types of controller cards.
F04MDN-1, F04MDU-1, F08SB-1 and F40-1 filter cards.
O08VA-1 variable optical attenuator card.
DCM cards using FBG and D0170DCF card.
I01T10G-1 LHS/LHDS and I08T10G-1 LHS/LHDS transponder cards.
O03CP-1 optical channel protection card.
Amplifiers and Raman fiber lasers from MPBC RMH07 series complete the long single
span architecture (see Figure 30).
Figure 30 Long single span architecture using SON and RMH07 series equipment
In dedicated configurations, the RHM07 series pre-amplifiers can be replaced by the
MPB Communications 1RU pre-amplifiers to save rack space.
g Long single span solutions using a 30 dBm MPBC RMH07 booster only support a
maximum of 32 channels (i.e., C03 to C10 bands, see Table 5).
For detailed information about the RMH07 series, please refer to the MPBC RMH07
series customer documentation.
10G
10G
SURPASS
hiT 7300
transponder
cards
SURPASS
hiT 7300
attenuator cards
SURPASS
hiT 7300 filter
cards
DCM
SURPASS hiT 7300 FBGs
MPBC
RMH07 booster
MPBC RMH07
pre-amplifier
MPBC RMH07
pre-amplifier
MPBC
RMH07 Raman
MPBC RMH07
SON
10G


62 A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
Technical Description (TED) Supported cards and equipment
5 Supported cards and equipment
This chapter lists and describes the cards and equipments supported by the SURPASS
hiT 7300 and their application in the NEs.
All cards have a specific name which is directly related to its function, type or usage.
Table 18 explains the card name scheme used for each card type.
Card type Card name scheme Description
Controller CCXP-1 X = controller type
Line amplifier LAXYC-1
X = span size
Y = amplifier type
Raman pump PRC-1 -
External pump PL-1 -
Channel power
monitor
MCPXXY-Z
XX = number of monitored channels
Y = number of input ports
Z = card version
Booster-less line
interface
LIFB-1 -
Filter
FXXYYY-1 ZZ
XX = number of channels
YYY = filter type
ZZ = operation sub-band
FXXYYY-1 Z
XX = number of channels
YYY = filter type
Z = operation band
FXXYY-1
XX = number of channels
YY = filter type
FXX-1 XX = number of channels
CWDM
patch-cord filter
FCXXU-1/Z
XX = number of channels
Z = filtered CWDM channel
CWDM
filter pack
FCXXYYY-1/Z
XX = number of channels
YYY = filter type
Z = filtered CWDM channel(s)
Attenuator OXXVA-1 XX = number of channels
Dispersion
compensation
DXXXXYYY
XXXX = dispersion value to compensate
YYY = fiber to compensate/technique
Table 18 Card name scheme explanation


A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
63
Technical Description (TED) Supported cards and equipment
5.1 Controller cards
Table 19 lists all the SURPASS hiT 7300 controller cards.
For detailed technical data about the controller cards, please refer to chapter 9.3.1.
The NE controller cards (CCEP-1 and CCMP-1) provide the central monitoring and con-
trolling functions of the system, as well as the MCF to operate the Q and QF Ethernet
interfaces (see chapter 6.3.4).
The controller card performs the following main functions:
Fault Management: monitoring all system alarms and forwarding their states to the
LCT and/or network management system.
Performance Management: sending all optical performance management informa-
tion to the network management system and/or a craft terminal and configure per-
formance thresholds for QoS alarms.
Configuration Management: configuring the system to either default settings or to
stored settings initiated by the network management system and/or a craft terminal.
Security Management: controlling the individual access to particular NE functions
via the network management system and/or a craft terminal, using a hierarchical
security management user ID and password concept.
Equipment Management: monitoring the actual and required shelf equipping.
Communication Management: implementing the MCF for the communication
between all NEs and the network management system.
Software Management: performing all software downloads, uploads, and software
integrity functions.
Real Time Management: controlling the real-time clock.
Providing alarm outputs from shelves and racks and important functionalities of the
optical link control.
Transponder
IXXTYGY-1
XX = maximum number of client interfaces
YY = transmission bit rate on line side
IXXTYYG-1 ZZ
XX = maximum number of client interfaces
YY = transmission bit rate on line side
ZZ = network type
Optical channel
protection
OXXCP-1 XX = number of protection ports
Card type Card name scheme Description
Table 18 Card name scheme explanation (Cont.)
Card name Usage
TIF
module
EOW
interface
Replaceable compact
flash module
CCEP-1 NE controller Yes Yes Yes
CCMP-1 NE controller No Yes Yes
CCSP-1 Shelf controller No Yes No
Table 19 Controller cards overview


64 A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
Technical Description (TED) Supported cards and equipment
Controlling the NE alarm LEDs (e.g., critical/major/minor, for communication and
equipment alarms).
g The CCEP-1 and CCMP-1 cards have a replaceable compact flash module located
at the back side of the card. This compact flash module stores all the NE specific
configurations. For ONN-I NEs that require more than 45 cards it is advisable to use
a 512 MBytes compact flash.
The CCSP-1 card is mainly responsible for the common tasks of each shelf such as
housekeeping (e.g., fan, power and card presence supervision).
5.2 Line Amplifier cards
Table 20 lists all the SURPASS hiT 7300 line amplifier cards.
For detailed technical data about the line amplifier cards, please refer to chapter 9.3.2.
The line amplifier cards provide the signal amplification by featuring a gain block with
one or two pump lasers, interstage access for dispersion compensation, a stage access
for external pumps and a gain control (see Figure 31).
Figure 31 Line amplifier cards basic structure
Card name Usage Variation
Interstage
access
External
pump
OSC
capability
LALBC-1 Long spans Booster amplifier Yes Yes Transmitter
LALBCH-1
Very long
spans
Booster amplifier Yes Yes Transmitter
LALIC-1 Long spans Inline amplifier Yes Yes
Receiver and
transmitter
LALPC-1 Long spans Pre-amplifier Yes Yes Receiver
LAMIC-1
Medium
spans
Inline amplifier Yes No
Receiver and
transmitter
LAMPC-1
Medium
spans
Pre-amplifier Yes No Receiver
LASBC-1 Short spans Booster amplifier No No Transmitter
Table 20 Line amplifier cards overview
nterstage
access port for
optional DCF
or FBG
Stage 3
with optional
pump card
Variable optical
atenuator
NPUT OUTPUT
External
monitor
nt. Mon
OSC
filter
GFF
EDFA
stage 3
EDFA
stage 2
EDFA
stage 1
OSC
filter
Available or not depending
of the LA card version


A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
65
Technical Description (TED) Supported cards and equipment
The line amplifier cards are divided in three types of amplification (inline, booster and
pre-amplifier) as described in Table 20.
Inline amplifier cards contain an optical amplifier for C-band and are used at inline sites
for optical amplification of the signal. The input power of the cards can be increased by
Raman pump cards (see chapter 5.3).
Booster amplifier cards contain an optical amplifier for C-band and are used at terminal
and intermediate sites for amplifying the outgoing line signal. There is only one booster
for each transmission direction of an OMS.
Pre-amplifier cards contain an optical amplifier for C-band and are used at terminal and
intermediate sites for amplifying the incoming line signal before it is fed into the demul-
tiplexing stage. There is only one pre-amplifier for each transmission direction of an
OMS. The output power of the line amplifier cards can be increased by external pump
cards.
5.3 Raman Pump card
Table 21 lists the SURPASS hiT 7300 Raman pump card.
For detailed technical data about the Raman pump card, please refer to chapter 9.3.3.
The Raman pump cards must be inserted at the receiving line interface. A Raman pump
can be inserted at the input of an LALIC-1 or LALPC-1 card. By using Raman pump
cards, the same amplifier spacing can be achieved with lower EDFA output power per
channel, allowing a higher total number of channels.
For certain links where the non-linear effects limit an increase in the number of spans,
a channel power reduction decreases the non-linear effects, and therefore allows a
higher number of spans. Raman amplifiers are preferably applied to bridge single extra
long spans.
Figure 32 displays the basic internal architecture of the Raman pump card.
Card name Usage
Number of
pumps
Number of
wavelengths
Operation
band
PRC-1 Long spans 4 2 C
Table 21 Raman pump card overview


66 A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
Technical Description (TED) Supported cards and equipment
Figure 32 PRC-1 basic structure
The pump signals from the laser diodes are first multiplexed from two different wave-
lengths. The multiplexed pump light is counter-directionally coupled into the fiber
carrying the received traffic signal.
Raman amplification
The basis of Raman amplification is the energy scattering effect called Stimulated
Raman Scattering (SRS). The SRS is a non-linear effect inherent to the fiber itself. SRS
involves a transfer of power from a signal at a higher frequency (lower wavelength) to
one at a lower frequency (higher wavelength), due to inelastic collisions in the fiber
medium. It can be used for optical amplification, in which the higher frequency light
serves as a pump source, amplifying the lower frequency wave carrying the actual traffic
signal to be amplified.
Counter-directional Raman pumping, i.e., Raman pumping light traveling in the opposite
direction to the traffic signal, is used. The Raman amplification process occurs at the end
of an optical span. When the signal is at its weakest, it is given renewed energy via the
pump light being inserted at the end of the hop in the reverse direction. Hence, Raman
amplification, is effective up to 30-40 km of a span.
5.4 External pump cards
Table 22 lists the SURPASS hiT 7300 external pump cards.
To adapt to the variable optical conditions in backbone networks, such as different span
lengths, fiber types and fiber properties, SURPASS hiT 7300 supports the integration of
external amplifier pumps (PL-1).
The PL-1 card can be used in combination with the LALx amplifier cards (pre-amplifier,
booster and inline variants), in order to achieve a higher output power.
The PL-1 is an active card (i.e., it is equipped with an on-board processor) which
contains an on-board memory to store the card inventory data.
Line
monitor
Raman
pump
monitor
Line
NPUT
Line
OUTPUT
nt.
APSD
nt.
10/100 BT
Controller
WDM
(2ch.)
OSC
monitor
Logi c unit
Card name Number of pumps Usage
PL-1 1 Increase the output power of the LALx cards
Table 22 External pump cards overview


A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
67
Technical Description (TED) Supported cards and equipment
5.5 Channel power monitor card
Table 23 lists the SURPASS hiT 7300 channel power monitor card.
The channel power monitor cards MCP404-1 and MCP404-2 provide an in-service mon-
itoring of the optical channel power levels. The card contains an Optical Spectrum
Analyzer (OSA) for 40 channels, which is periodically connected to 4 optical input ports
(see Figure 33).
Figure 33 MCP404-1 and MCP404-2 functional diagram
The MCP404-x card is used for:
In-service measurement of optical channel power levels of 40 channels on a
100 GHz grid at the source monitoring output port for all optical amplifier card types
as well as for the OSC termination card (LIFB-1).
Measurement used for an automated enhanced pre-emphasis configuration on an
optical pre-emphasis section (i.e., an OMS with full channel multiplexing/demulti-
plexing). Using MCP404-x card at the beginning and end of an OMS in combination
with an attenuator card, provides a fully automated optical link commissioning and
an in-service channel upgrade.
Measurement of an automatic in-service amplifier tilt control. Using MCP404-x card
at the beginning and end of an OMS, allows tilt correction values to be distributed
over the whole OMS.
5.6 Booster-less line interface card
Table 24 lists the SURPASS hiT 7300 booster-less line interface card (LIFB-1).
Card name
Number of
monitoring ports
Supported
bit rates
Usage
MCP404-1 4
2.5 Gbit/s
10 Gbit/s
40 Gbit/s
40 channels monitoring (per port)
MCP404-2 4
2.5 Gbit/s
10 Gbit/s
40 channels monitoring (per port)
Table 23 Channel power monitor card overview
OSA
MonP1
MonP2
MonP3
MonP4
T
a
p

1
T
a
p

2
T
a
p

3
T
a
p

4


68 A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
Technical Description (TED) Supported cards and equipment
The LIFB-1 card was designed to be used in regional DWDM networks with shorter
spans by providing the following functions:
OSC termination (transmission direction).
Low cost line termination booster card without EDFA (i.e., no amplification is per-
formed).
Optical output monitors for optical channel power monitoring either via an external
OSA or via the MCP404-x monitoring card.
Internal power monitor of the total received input power.
Optical link control behavior equivalent to the LASBC-1 card.
5.7 Filter cards
Table 25 lists all the SURPASS hiT 7300 filter cards.
For detailed technical data about the filter cards, please refer to chapter 9.3.7.
The filter cards act as multiplexers/demultiplexers by providing the primary wave
division or aggregation of all the transponder signals and allowing access (add/drop) to
a particular set of wavelengths from an optical fiber while passing the remaining wave-
lengths.
Line side wavelengths require translation to client side equipment via the transponder
card (see chapter 5.12).
Card name Architecture Usage
LIFB-1
1 x OSC insertion filter
1 x OSC transmitter
OSC termination for booster-less
ONN applications
Table 24 OSC termination card overview
Card name Channels Usage Architecture
Communication
type
F04MDN-1 4
Optical multiplexer
and demultiplexer
TFF based bidirectional
F04MDU-1 4
Optical multiplexer
and demultiplexer
TFF muxes and
4skip0 filters
bidirectional
F08SB-1 2 x 4
Optical sub-band
multiplexer
4skip0 and red-
blue splitter
bidirectional
F16SB-1 4 x 4
Optical sub-band
multiplexer
4skip0 bidirectional
F40-1 40
Optical multiplexer
or demultiplexer
AWG unidirectional
F40MR-1 40
Optical add
Reconfigurable
OADM/multiplexer
PLC-WSS bidirectional
Table 25 Filter cards overview


A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
69
Technical Description (TED) Supported cards and equipment
5.7.1 F04MDN-1
The F04MDN-1 card consists of one fixed filter with four bidirectional channels. The
F04MDN-1 is offered in ten different variants (sub-bands C1-C10) to cover the entire 40
channel wavelength plan (see Figure 34).
Figure 34 F04MDN-1 card structure
5.7.2 F04MDU-1
The F04MDU-1 card consists of one band filter and one corresponding fixed filter with
four bidirectional channels. It is offered in ten different variants (sub-bands C1-C10) to
cover the entire 40 channel wavelength plan (see Figure 35).
Figure 35 F04MDU-1 card structure
5.7.3 F08SB-1
The F08SB-1 card consists of a red/blue filter and two bidirectional band filters. It offers
two band filters for sub-band C5 and C6 and a red/blue filter that separates sub-bands
C1-C4 from sub-bands C7-C10. There is only one variant of this card (see Figure 36).
Figure 36 F08SB-1 card structure
Cx
F04MDN-1
i j l k
Cx
F04MDU-1
i j l k
F08SB-1
C01, C02, C03, C04
C07, C08, C09, C10
C05
C06


70 A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
Technical Description (TED) Supported cards and equipment
5.7.4 F16SB-1
Each F16SB-1 card consists of four bidirectional cascaded band filters. It is offered in
two variants for sub-bands C1-C4 (blue band) and sub-bands C7-C10 (red band),
respectively (see Figure 37).
Figure 37 F16SB-1 card structure
5.7.5 F40-1
The F40-1 card consists of a 40 channels fixed filter based on temperature-controlled
Arrayed Waveguide Grating (AWG) technology.
The F40-1 card is unidirectional and performs either an optical multiplexing or demulti-
plexing (see Figure 38).
Figure 38 F40-1 card structure
When used as a demultiplexer, an optical input power monitor is provided for detection
of loss-of-signal and laser safety control.
5.7.6 F40MR-1
SURPASS hiT 7300 supports wavelength selective switching for building a ROADM
(ONN-R) providing full access to 40 optical channels. The key component for this appli-
cation is the F40MR-1 card which includes an integrated Planar Lightwave Circuit-
Wavelength Selective Switch (PLC-WSS) with low insertion loss, providing a remotely
(via software) reconfigurable optical switching function per individual wavelength (see
Figure 39).
F16SB-1 (blue)
C01
C02
C03
C04
F16SB-1 (red)
C07
C08
C09
C10
F40-1
192.1 ... 196.0 THz
...
Multiplexing
1 2 40
F40-1
192.1 ... 196.0 THz
Demultiplexing
...
1 2 40


A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
71
Technical Description (TED) Supported cards and equipment
Figure 39 F40MR-1 card structure
The input DWDM signal from the line interface (optical pre-amplifier) is splitted into
express traffic and local drop traffic. The express direction provides an optical input
power monitor for detection of loss-of-signal and laser safety control.
The output DWDM signal toward the line interface (booster or booster-less interface) of
the PLC-WSS, is a DWDM signal which results from a 40 channels multiplexing. These
40 multiplexed channels are individually selectable (via software) between the 40
incoming express channels and the 40 local add channels.
For each optical channel to be transmitted a Variable Optical Attenuator (VOA) function
and an optical power monitor diode are available.
5.8 CWDM equipment
The CWDM equipment is available in patch-cord and filter pack solutions. The following
sub-chapters provide information regarding both solutions.
5.8.1 Patch-cord solution
The patch-cord solution is provided by the add/drop patch-cord FC01U-1/n. The FC01U-
1/n patch-cord is an optical Y-cable with 3 LC/PC connectors which allows the add/drop
of a single CWDM channel.
The 3 LC/PC connectors have distinct purposes. The Add/Drop port connector contains
an unidirectional CWDM add or drop port for direct interconnection with a CWDM SFP
(Tx or Rx port) of a transponder client interface. Incoming CWDM traffic is received from
the unidirectional Common port connector and outgoing traffic is transmitted by the uni-
directional Express port connector.
Figure 40 displays an arrangement using two unidirectional add/drop patch-cords for
adding and dropping a bidirectional CWDM channel.
D
M
U
X
.
.
.
.
.
.
192.1
THz
196.0
THz ...
VOA
VOA
VOA
Rx Express
Tx Express
Tx Drop
Tx Line
Rx Line
Rx Add Channels
PLC-WSS
splitter
booster
(or booster-less
line /F)
pre-ampl.
t
o
/
f
r
o
m

F
4
0
M
R
-
1

o
f

c
o
u
n
t
e
r
-
d
i
r
e
c
t
i
o
n



M
U
X


72 A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
Technical Description (TED) Supported cards and equipment
Figure 40 CWDM add/drop patch-cord
5.8.2 Filter pack solution
For a higher number of CWDM channels a passive filter pack solution is available which
consists of a small (1HU) filter pack shelf (SPF-1) to plug up to 4 CWDM filter modules.
Figure 41 displays the CWDM filter pack shelf, which can be mounted within SURPASS
hiT 7300 ETSI, standard ETSI, ANSI, and 19 racks, depending on the application and
mechanical environment.
Figure 41 CWDM filter pack shelf
Table 26 lists the passive CWDM filter modules available for the filter pack shelves.
to/from CWDM SFP
transponder client /F
common port
d
r
o
p

p
o
r
t
Add/drop
patch cord
FC01U-1/n
(n=1 ... 8)
CWDM
spectrum
L
C
/
P
C

c
o
n
n
e
c
t
o
r

w
i
t
h

C
W
D
M

a
d
d

o
r

d
r
o
p

p
o
r
t
a
d
d

p
o
r
t
common port express port
CWDM
spectrum
L
C
/
P
C

c
o
n
n
e
c
t
o
r

w
i
t
h

C
W
D
M

a
d
d

o
r

d
r
o
p

p
o
r
t
LC/PC connector
LC/PC connector
LC/PC connector
express port
LC/PC connector
Name
Communication
type
Channels
Module
height
Upgrade
port
FC01MDUP-1/n bidirectional 1 CWDM channel 1/2 HU Yes
Table 26 CWDM filter modules overview


A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
73
Technical Description (TED) Supported cards and equipment
Figure 42 displays the functional diagrams of the FC01MDUP-1/n, FC04MDUP-1/E and
FC04MDP-1/C filter modules.
Figure 42 FC01MDUP-1/n, FC04MDUP-1/E and FC04MDP-1/C functional diagrams
5.9 Variable Optical Attenuator cards
Table 27 lists the SURPASS hiT 7300 VOA card.
For detailed technical data about the VOA card, please refer to chapter 9.3.9.
FC04MDUP-1/E bidirectional
4 Edge CWDM
channels
1 HU Yes
FC04MDP-1/C bidirectional
4 Center CWDM
channels
1 HU No
Name
Communication
type
Channels
Module
height
Upgrade
port
Table 26 CWDM filter modules overview (Cont.)
FC01MDUP-1/n (n = 1 ... 8)
single-channel port common port
upgrade
port
F-n
2C-n
CWDM
filter
F-Out
Dx-Out
1C-Out
single-channel port common port
upgrade
port
CWDM
filter
Mx-n
Dx-Out
per-channel
ports
Mx-n
C2-n
C1-Out
A-Out
B-Out
C-Out
D-Out
Ch. 1
Ch. 2
Ch. 7
Ch. 8
Ch. 1
Ch. 2
Ch. 7
Ch. 8
A-n
B-n
C-n
D-n
FC04MDUP-1/E
upgrade
port
upgrade
port
CWDM
filter
CWDM
filter
common port
common port
per-channel
ports
per-channel
ports
C2-n
C1-Out
A-Out
B-Out
C-Out
D-Out
Ch. 3
Ch. 4
Ch. 5
Ch. 6
Ch. 3
Ch. 4
Ch. 5
Ch. 6
A-n
B-n
C-n
D-n
FC04MDP-1/C
CWDM
filter
CWDM
filter
common port
common port
per-channel
ports
Card name Channels Architecture Communication type
O08VA-1 8 8 x VOA unidirectional
Table 27 VOA card overview


74 A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
Technical Description (TED) Supported cards and equipment
The VOA card is a variable attenuator that can supply up to 8 EVOA channels. The VOA
card has application in pre-emphasis and de-emphasis and is used per channel or per
sub-band.
5.10 Dispersion Compensation Module cards
Table 28 lists all the SURPASS hiT 7300 DCM cards.
For detailed technical data about the DCM cards, please refer to chapter 9.3.10.
The DCM cards are primarily used to counteract the chromatic dispersion of the signal
traveling through the optical fiber. This chromatic dispersion has the effect of spreading
the signal pulse width leading to inter-symbol interference, no longer allowing an
accurate recognition of a single one bit or a single zero bit.
The DCM cards contain spools of DCF or FBG, that have the opposite dispersion char-
acteristics compared to the fiber used for signal transmission, SSMF or LEAF, therefore
compressing the signal for better optical performance.
The strategy for selecting DCM cards is highly system-dependent and is influenced by
the optical performance limiting effects, such as Self Phase Modulation (SPM), Cross
Phase Modulation (XPM), Raman crosstalk, etc.
DCM cards are normally located in the interstage access of each optical amplifier, com-
pensating insertion loss of the DCM by the amplifier design.
Card name Compensation (ps/nm) Technique Optimized for
D0340SMF -336 FBG SSMF
D0680SMF -672 FBG SSMF
D1020SMF -1008 FBG SSMF
D1360SMF -1344 FBG SSMF
D1700SMF -1680 FBG SSMF
D0340LEF -336 FBG LEAF (NZ-DSF)
D0510LEF -504 FBG LEAF (NZ-DSF)
D0680LEF -672 FBG LEAF (NZ-DSF)
D0170DCF -168 DCF SSMF
D0340DCF -340 DCF SSMF
D0510DCF -510 DCF SSMF
D0680DCF -680 DCF SSMF
D1020DCF -1020 DCF SSMF
D1360DCF -1360 DCF SSMF
Table 28 DCM cards overview


A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
75
Technical Description (TED) Supported cards and equipment
5.11 Unidirectional Dispersion Compensation Modules
Unlike all the other cards, Unidirectional Dispersion Compensation Module (UDCM)
cards are not supplied as shelf plug-in cards. They are mounted in a specific plug-in box
inside a UDCM tray (see Figure 43).
Figure 43 UDCM plug-in box and tray
Table 29 lists all the SURPASS hiT 7300 UDCM cards.
Card name Compensation (ps/nm) Technique Optimized for
UDCMC5LL -85 DCF SSMF
UDCMC10LL -170 DCF SSMF
UDCMC15LL -255 DCF SSMF
UDCMC20LL -340 DCF SSMF
UDCMC25LL -425 DCF SSMF
UDCMC30LL -510 DCF SSMF
UDCMC60LL -1020 DCF SSMF
UDCMC80LL -1360 DCF SSMF
UDCMC100LL -1700 DCF SSMF
UDCMC120LL -2040 DCF SSMF
UDCM340H +340 DCF LEAF
UDCM510H +510 DCF LEAF
UDCMC48P +48 DCF NZDSF
UDCMC80P +80 DCF NZDSF
UDCMC128P +128 DCF NZDSF
UDCMC177P +177 DCF NZDSF
UDCMC240P +240 DCF NZDSF
UDCMC384P +384 DCF NZDSF
UDCMC480P +480 DCF NZDSF
Table 29 UDCM cards overview
Blank (dummy) UDCM. To be installed
in those positions that do not have an
actual UDCM installed
Single-height UDCM
Double-height UDCM
UDCM tray


76 A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
Technical Description (TED) Supported cards and equipment
For detailed technical data about the UDCM cards, please refer to chapter 9.3.11.
Depending on link length and fiber type, different UDCMs are used to enhance the
optical signal quality of 40 Gbit/s channels.
The UDCMs are based on the dispersion compensation fiber technique. Since the com-
pensating effect is achieved by the wavelength dependent signal delay in the optical
fiber, a big amount of fiber is required. Therefore UDCMs are provided as plug-in boxes
that contain the fiber length required on a spool.
5.12 Transponder cards
Table 30 lists all the SURPASS hiT 7300 transponder cards.
UDCMC576P +576 DCF NZDSF
Card name Compensation (ps/nm) Technique Optimized for
Table 29 UDCM cards overview (Cont.)
Card name
Transport
network
Error correction
(line side only)
Usage
Hot-pluggable
modules
I04T2G5-1 Regio FEC
Transponder/Muxponder
and Regenerator
SFP
DWDM-SFP
CWDM-SFP
I01T10G-1 Regio Regio S-FEC
Transponder and
Regenerator
XFP
I01T10G-1 LH LH S-FEC
Transponder and
Regenerator
XFP
I01T10G-1 LHS Submarine LH S-FEC
Transponder and
Regenerator
XFP
I01T10G-1 LHD
(higher dispersion tolerance)
LH S-FEC
Transponder and
Regenerator
XFP
I01T10G-1 LHDS
(higher dispersion tolerance)
Submarine LH S-FEC
Transponder and
Regenerator
XFP
I08T10G-1 Regio Regio S-FEC Transponder/Muxponder
SFP
DWDM-SFP
CWDM-SFP
I08T10G-1 LH LH S-FEC Transponder/Muxponder
SFP
DWDM-SFP
CWDM-SFP
I08T10G-1 LHS Submarine LH S-FEC Transponder/Muxponder
SFP
DWDM-SFP
CWDM-SFP
Table 30 Transponder cards overview


A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
77
Technical Description (TED) Supported cards and equipment
For detailed technical data about the transponder cards, please refer to chapter 9.3.12.
g For the I01T10G-1 Regio/LH(S)/LHD(S) cards the regenerator mode is available via
client back-to-back interconnection of transponder cards.
5.12.1 I04T2G5-1
The I04T2G5-1 card is used at each end of DWDM metro, regional and LH links, as a
bidirectional interface between a client interface and a line interface.
The regenerator mode of the I04T2G5-1 card provides the 3R regenerator function
between both OTU1 line ports.
For line interface the I04T2G5-1 card can use a DWDM-SFP or a CWDM-SFP (for SON
applications only) which provides a fixed wavelength laser, delivering an optical signal
suitable for direct connection to a DWDM or CWDM system.
In cascade scenarios where a I04T2G5-1 and I08T10G-1 cards are interconnected, the
line side can be equipped with uncolored SFPs.
The optical 2.5 Gbit/s client interfaces of the I04T2G5-1 card are equipped with 4 hot-
pluggable SFP modules that are mounted on the front panel of the card. The SFP
module performs the optical/electrical conversion in both signal directions (see Figure
44).
Figure 44 SFP module (example)
Table 31 lists the electrical and optical GbE SFP client interfaces available for the
I04T2G5-1 card.
I08T10G-1 LHD
(higher dispersion tolerance)
LH S-FEC Transponder/Muxponder
SFP
DWDM-SFP
CWDM-SFP
I08T10G-1 LHDS
(higher dispersion tolerance)
Submarine LH S-FEC Transponder/Muxponder
SFP
DWDM-SFP
CWDM-SFP
Card name
Transport
network
Error correction
(line side only)
Usage
Hot-pluggable
modules
Table 30 Transponder cards overview (Cont.)


78 A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
Technical Description (TED) Supported cards and equipment
Table 32 lists the STM-16 and OC-48 SFP client interfaces available for the I04T2G5-1
card.
Table 33 lists the OTU1 SFP client interfaces available for the I04T2G5-1 card.
Table 34 lists the FC and FICON SFP client interfaces available for the I04T2G5-1 card.
Interface type/data rate
Target transmission distance
0.1 km 0.5 km 10 km 40 km 80 km 120 km
Electrical
1000BASE/1.25 Gbit/s
T - - - - -
Optical
1000BASE/1.25 Gbit/s
- SX LX - ZX -
CWDM/1.25 Gbit/s - - - C8S1-0D2 C8L1-0D2 -
DWDM/1.25 Gbit/s - - - - DWDM-SFP
Enhanced
DWDM-SFP
Table 31 I04T2G5-1 card GbE SFP client interfaces
Interface type/data rate
Target transmission distance
2 km 15 km 40 km 80 km 120 km
STM-16/2.49 Gbit/s I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2 -
OC-48/2.49 Gbit/s SR IR-1 LR-1 LR-2 -
CWDM/2.49 Gbit/s - - C8S1-1D2 C8L1-1D2 -
DWDM/2.49 Gbit/s - - - DWDM-SFP
Enhanced
DWDM-SFP
Table 32 I04T2G5-1 card STM-16 and OC-48 SFP client interfaces
Interface type/data rate
Target transmission distance
2 km 15 km 40 km 80 km 120 km
OTU1/2.67 Gbit/s P1I1-1D1 P1S1-1D1 P1L1-1D1 P1L1-1D2 -
CWDM/2.67 Gbit/s - - C8S1-1D2 C8L1-1D2 -
DWDM/2.67 Gbit/s - - - DWDM-SFP
Enhanced
DWDM-SFP
Table 33 I04T2G5-1 card OTU1 SFP client interfaces
Interface
type/data rate
Target transmission distance
0.3 km 0.5 km 10 km 40 km 50 km 80 km 120 km
FC/FICON/1.06 Gbit/s -
100-M5-
SN-I
100-SM-
LC-L
-
100-SM-
LL-V
- -
Table 34 I04T2G5-1 card FC and FICON SFP client interfaces


A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
79
Technical Description (TED) Supported cards and equipment
The client interfaces of the I04T2G5-1 card support the following configurations:
Maximum of four SFP modules.
Maximum of two SFP modules plus two DWDM-SFP modules.
The DWDM-SFP modules can only be used on client ports with heat sinks, i.e., ports 1
and 3. The line interfaces of the I04T2G5-1 card support a maximum of two CWDM-SFP
or DWDM-SFP modules.
g Enhanced DWDM-SFP modules can only be used in SON NEs.
SFP and DWDM-SFP modules provide the following benefits:
Can be quickly exchanged.
Costs can be reduced (e.g., only one I04T2G5-1 card with different SFP types of
modules instead of different I04T2G5-1 cards).
The I04T2G5-1 card implements standard compliant mapping schemes of all client
signals types into an OTU1 optical channel according to ITU-T G.806 and G.709.
Figure 45 displays these mapping schemes for the different client signal types.
Figure 45 Mapping schemes of client signals to OTU1 optical channel
FC/FICON/2.13 Gbit/s
200-M5-
SN-I
-
200-SM-
LC-L
-
200-SM-
LL-V
- -
DWDM/1.06 Gbit/s - - - - - DWDM-SFP
Enhanced
DWDM-SFP
DWDM/2.13 Gbit/s - - - - - DWDM-SFP
Enhanced
DWDM-SFP
CWDM/1.06 Gbit/s - - - C8S1-0D2 - C8L1-0D2 -
CWDM/2.13 Gbit/s - - - C8S1-1D2 - C8L1-1D2 -
Interface
type/data rate
Target transmission distance
0.3 km 0.5 km 10 km 40 km 50 km 80 km 120 km
Table 34 I04T2G5-1 card FC and FICON SFP client interfaces (Cont.)
Cli ent /F Line /F
GE / FC 1G
(1.25, 1.0625 Gbit/s)
OPU1 ODU1 OTU1 OChr
asyn.
asyn.
STM-16 / OC-48
OTU1
(w/o FEC)
ODU1 OTU1 OChr
OTU1
(2.6660514 Gbit/s)
(2.6660514 Gbit/s)
(2.488320 Gbit/s)
(2.6660514 Gbit/s)
(1.25, 1.0625 Gbit/s)
(2.125 Gbit/s)
GFP-T
OPU1 OTU1 OChr
GFP
MX/DX
GFP-T
asyn.
asyn.
(2.6660514 Gbit/s)
GFP-T OPU1 OTU1 OChr
asyn.
asyn.
(2.6660514 Gbit/s)
FC 2G
GE / FC 1G


80 A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
Technical Description (TED) Supported cards and equipment
5.12.2 I01T10G-1 Regio/LH(S)/LHD(S)
The I01T10G-1 Regio/LH(S)/LHD(S) card is used at each end of regional and LH
DWDM links, as a bidirectional interface between a client interface and a line interface.
Each I01T10G-1 Regio/LH(S)/LHD(S) card generates and terminates an optical channel
of a wavelength appropriate for DWDM transmission. The exact wavelength is con-
trolled via a tunable transmit laser, only available in the I01T10G-1 LH(S) and I01T10G-
1 LHD(S) card. The S-FEC feature allows longer span distances.
The I01T10G-1 Regio card uses a Multi-Source Agreement (MSA300) module (for line
interface) which can handle 40 fixed wavelengths, and is equipped with an Electro-
Absorption Modulator (EAM), temperature-controlled, with wavelength accuracy
suitable for 100 GHz DWDM channel spacing.
The I01T10G-1 LH(S) card uses an MSA300 LH NRZ module (for line interface) inte-
grated in the card, and are equipped with a Mach Zehnder Modulator (MZM), tempera-
ture-controlled and wavelength tunable laser, with wavelength accuracy suitable for 50
GHz and 100 GHz DWDM channel spacing.
The I01T10G-1 LHD(S) card uses a MSA300 LH NRZ module (for line interface) which
can handle a higher dispersion and a higher PMD load, by using a Maximum Likelihood
Sequence Estimator (MLSE).
The optical 10 Gbit/s client interfaces of the I01T10G-1 Regio/LH(S)/LHD(S) card are
equipped with one hot-pluggable 10 Gigabit Small Form Factor Pluggable (XFP) module
mounted on the front panel of the card. The XFP module, like the SFP, performs the opti-
cal/electrical conversion in both signal directions (see Figure 46).
Figure 46 XFP module (example)
Table 35 lists the 10GbE XFP client interfaces available for the I01T10G-1
Regio/LH(S)/LHD(S) card.
Interface type/data rate
Target transmission distance
0.3 km 2 km 40 km 80 km
10GbE LAN/10.31 Gbit/s SR LR ER ZR
Table 35 I01T10G-1 card 10GbE XFP client interfaces


A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
81
Technical Description (TED) Supported cards and equipment
Table 36 lists the STM-64 and OC-192 XFP client interfaces available for the I01T10G-
1 Regio/LH(S)/LHD(S) card.
Table 37 lists the OTU2 XFP client interfaces available for the I01T10G-1
Regio/LH(S)/LHD(S) card.
The XFP module provides the following benefits:
XFP modules can be quickly exchanged.
Costs can be reduced (e.g., only one I01T10G-1 card can hold different types of
XFP modules).
The I01T10G-1 Regio/LH(S)/LHD(S) card implements a standard compliant mapping
scheme for STM-64/OC-192 signals into an OTU2V optical channel according to ITU-T
G.806 and G.709.
Figure 47 displays these mapping schemes for the different client signal types.
Figure 47 Mapping schemes of client signals to OTU2V optical channel
10GbE WAN/9.95 Gbit/s SW LW EW ZW
Interface type/data rate
Target transmission distance
2 km 40 km 80 km
STM-64/9.95 Gbit/s I-64.1 S-64.2b P1L1-2D2
OC-192/9.95 Gbit/s SR-1 IR-2b P1L1-2D2
Table 36 I01T10G-1 STM-64 and OC-192 10 Gbit/s XFP client interfaces
Interface type/data rate
Target transmission distance
2 km 40 km 80 km
OTU2/10.71 Gbit/s P1I1-2D1 P1S1-2D2b P1L1-2D2
Table 37 I01T10G-1 OTU2 10 Gbit/s XFP client interfaces
Interface type/data rate
Target transmission distance
0.3 km 2 km 40 km 80 km
Table 35 I01T10G-1 card 10GbE XFP client interfaces (Cont.)
OPU2
(w/o stuff.)
ODU2 OChr
syn.
syn.
10GbE LAN
OPU2 ODU2
OTU2V
(SUPER-FEC)
OChr
asyn.
asyn.
STM-64 / OC-192 /
10GbE WAN
Cli ent /F
11.00320 Gbit/s
11.35241 Gbit/s
(10.3125 Gbit/s)
(9.953280 Gbit/s)
Line /F
OTU2 ODU2 OChr
OTU2
11.00320 Gbit/s
(10.7092253 Gbit/s)
OTU2V
(SUPER-FEC)
OTU2V
(SUPER-FEC)


82 A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
Technical Description (TED) Supported cards and equipment
5.12.3 I08T10G-1 LH(S)/LHD(S)/Regio
The I08T10G-1 Regio/LH(S)/LHD(S) card is used at each end of DWDM regional and
LH DWDM links, as a bidirectional interface between a client interface and a line inter-
face.
Each I08T10G-1 Regio/LH(S)/LHD(S) card generates and terminates an optical channel
of a wavelength appropriate for DWDM transmission. The exact wavelength is con-
trolled via a tunable transmit laser, only available in the I08T10G-1 LH(S) and I08T10G-
1 LHD(S) card. The S-FEC feature allows longer span distances.
The I08T10G-1 Regio card uses a MSA300 module (for line interface) which can handle
40 fixed wavelengths, and is equipped with an EAM, temperature-controlled, with wave-
length accuracy suitable for 100 GHz DWDM channel spacing.
The I08T10G-1 LH(S) card uses an MSA300 LH NRZ module (for line interface) inte-
grated in the card, and are equipped with a MZM, temperature-controlled and wave-
length tunable laser, with wavelength accuracy suitable for 50 GHz and 100 GHz DWDM
channel spacing.
The I08T10G-1 LHD(S) card uses a MSA300 LH NRZ module (for line interface) which
can handle a higher dispersion and a higher PMD load, by using an MLSE.
The optical client interfaces of the I08T10G-1 Regio/LH(S)/LHD(S) card are equipped
with 8 hot-pluggable SFP modules that are mounted on the front panel of the card. The
SFP module performs the optical/electrical conversion in both signal directions.
Table 38 lists the electrical and optical GbE SFP client interfaces available for the
I08T10G-1 Regio/LH(S)/LHD(S) card.
Table 39 lists the STM-16 and OC-48 SFP client interfaces available for the I08T10G-1
Regio/LH(S)/LHD(S) card.
Interface type/data rate
Target transmission distance
0.1 km 0.5 km 10 km 40 km 80 km 120 km
Electrical
1000BASE/1.25 Gbit/s
T - - - - -
Optical
1000BASE/1.25 Gbit/s
- SX LX - ZX -
CWDM/1.25 Gbit/s - - - C8S1-0D2 C8L1-0D2 -
DWDM/1.25 Gbit/s - - - - DWDM-SFP
Enhanced
DWDM-SFP
Table 38 I08T10G-1 card GbE SFP client interfaces
Interface type/data rate
Target transmission distance
2 km 15 km 40 km 80 km 120 km
STM-16/2.49 Gbit/s I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2 -
OC-48/2.49 Gbit/s SR IR-1 LR-1 LR-2 -
CWDM/2.49 Gbit/s - - C8S1-1D2 C8L1-1D2 -
Table 39 I08T10G-1 card STM-16 and OC-48 SFP client interfaces


A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
83
Technical Description (TED) Supported cards and equipment
Table 40 lists the OTU1 SFP client interfaces available for the I08T10G-1 card.
The client interfaces of the I08T10G-1 card support the following configurations:
Maximum of eight SFP modules.
Maximum of four SFP modules plus four DWDM-SFP modules.
The DWDM-SFP modules can only be used on client ports with heat sinks, i.e., ports 1,
3, 5 and 7.
g Enhanced DWDM-SFP modules can only be used in SON NEs.
The I08T10G-1 Regio/LH(S)/LHD(S) card implements a standard compliant mapping
scheme for STM-64/OC-192 signals mapped into an OPU1/ODU1 and multiplexed to an
OTU2V optical channel according to ITU-T G.806 and G.709.
The I08T10G-1 card implements a standard compliant mapping scheme for all client
signals into an OTU2V optical channel according to ITU-T G.806 and G.709.
Figure 48 displays these mapping schemes for the different client signal types.
Figure 48 Mapping schemes of client signals to OTU2V optical channel
DWDM/2.49 Gbit/s - - - DWDM-SFP
Enhanced
DWDM-SFP
Interface type/data rate
Target transmission distance
2 km 15 km 40 km 80 km 120 km
Table 39 I08T10G-1 card STM-16 and OC-48 SFP client interfaces (Cont.)
Interface type/data rate
Target transmission distance
2 km 15 km 40 km 80 km 120 km
OTU1/2.67 Gbit/s P1I1-1D1 P1S1-1D1 P1L1-1D1 P1L1-1D2
CWDM/2.67 Gbit/s - - C8S1-1D2 C8L1-1D2
DWDM/2.67 Gbit/s - - - DWDM-SFP
Enhanced
DWDM-SFP
Table 40 I08T10G-1 card OTU1 SFP client interfaces
OPU1 ODU1 ODTU12
ODTUG2
OPU2 ODU2 OTU2V OChr
STM-16 / OC-48
syn.
asyn. asyn.
asyn.
Kx
OTU1
(w/o FEC)
ODU1 ODTU12
asyn.
asyn.
Lx
OTU1
Line /F
1
1
.
0
0
3
2
0

G
b
i
t
/
s
)
(2.488320 Gbit/s)
(2.6660514 Gbit/s)
Cli ent /F
ODU1 ODTU12
asyn.
asyn.
Mx
GFP-T
OPU1
GbE
GFP
MX/DX
GFP-T
GbE
asyn.
asyn.
(1.25 Gbit/s)
K + L + M <= 4
STM16CBR
OTU2V
(1.25 Gbit/s)


84 A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
Technical Description (TED) Supported cards and equipment
5.13 Optical channel protection card
Table 41 lists the SURPASS hiT 7300 OChP card.
The OChP card O03CP-1 is a passive card which contains 6 optical splitters. Three act
as combiners to switch the traffic together with the 10 Gbit/s transponder cards. The
remaining three are used for bridging the traffic for protection (see Figure 49).
Figure 49 O03CP-1 basic structure
Up to three protection groups can be created and managed by the O03CP-1 card (i.e.,
three pairs of client interfaces).
Card name
Number of protected
channels
Architecture
Communication
type
O03CP-1 3 3 splitters and 3 combiners bidirectional
Table 41 OChP card overview
50%
splitter
50%
splitter
50%
splitter
50%
combiner
50%
combiner
50%
combiner
Client1 N
Client2 N
Client3 N
Client3 OUT
Client2 OUT
Client1 OUT
Protection2 OUT
Protection1 OUT
Protection3 OUT
Protection3 N
Protection2 N
Protection1 N
Working1 OUT
Working2 OUT
Working3 OUT
Working3 N
Working2 N
Working1 N


A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
85
Technical Description (TED) Mechanical design
6 Mechanical design
This chapter provides an overview of the mechanical features of SURPASS hiT 7300
shelves, racks and cards.
For information about the cards supported by SURPASS hiT 7300, see chapter 5.
6.1 Shelves
SURPASS hiT 7300 comprises one single-shelf solution. Due to ANSI and ETSI stan-
dards, two shelf types are available in order to meet cabling and mounting brackets
requirements.
Table 42 describes the available shelf types on SURPASS hiT 7300:
6.1.1 Shelf design details
All available shelf types have the following characteristics:
16 card slots. All slots are non-card specific with the exception of the far right-hand
slot which is dedicated to the controller card (see chapter 6.3.4).
Fiber guides to assist in the orderly routing of fibers to/from the cards.
Slide-in cooling fan unit with replaceable air filter element (see chapter 6.1.2).
Front-access connector panel (see chapter 6.1.3).
Optional bolt-on front cover for added protection of fiber and cards.
Edge protectors at the fiber entry/exit of the shelf.
Figure 50 and Figure 51 display the design of SURPASS hiT 7300 shelves.
Shelf Type Description
ANSI shelf
(see Figure 50)
Mounts in standard 23-inch ANSI racks.
Shelf occupies 12U of vertical rack space (21 inches).
Mounting flanges are 5-inches behind front plane of shelf
(see Figure 51).
Overall dimensions:
23" wide x 20.4" high x 11" deep
ETSI shelf
(see Figure 50)
Mounts in standard and hiT 7300 600 mm ETSI racks.
Shelf occupies 22SU of vertical rack space (550 mm).
Mounting flanges are 40 mm (on standard ETSI racks)
behind front plane of shelf or 125 mm (on hiT 7300 ETSI
racks) behind front plane of shelf (see Figure 51).
Overall dimensions:
533 mm wide x 517.5 mm high x 280 mm deep
Table 42 Shelf types description


86 A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
Technical Description (TED) Mechanical design
Figure 50 SURPASS hiT 7300 ANSI and ETSI shelves
SURPASS hiT 7300 SheIf
ANSI/ETSI type
Connector
panel (COPA)
Fan Unit and
Air Filter
Fiber routing
guides
Plug-in card
area (16 slots)
Distance between mounting holes of the ETS shelf is 515 mm
Shelf requires 22 SU of vertical rack space (550 mm)
Distance between mounting holes of the ANS shelf is 22.31 inches
Shelf requires 12 U of vertical rack space (21 inches)


A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
87
Technical Description (TED) Mechanical design
Figure 51 ANSI and ETSI shelf details
6.1.2 Shelf fan unit and air filter
The shelf fan unit and air filter are mounted in the bottom of the shelf, between the fiber
routing guides and the connector panel (see Figure 50).
Fan unit
Each shelf is equipped with a fan unit that provides cooling airflow for the cards. The fan
unit is held securely in place by manually operated latches.
The operating status of the four individual fans inside the unit is monitored. Detection of
a fault condition will raise the appropriate system alarm and light the LED on the front of
the fan unit.
Front cover
(optional)
Edge
protectors
SURPASS hiT 7300 ANSI sheIf
Mounting flanges are 5 inches
behind front plane of the shelf.
5''
SURPASS hiT 7300 ETSI sheIf
Mounting flanges are 125 mm
behind front plane of the shelf.
125
mm
Front cover
(optional)
Edge
protectors


88 A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
Technical Description (TED) Mechanical design
Air filter
The fan unit contains a one-piece replaceable air filter element to protect the shelf from
ingesting environmental dust or other airborne contaminants.
The following containers/central offices and air filter replacement periods are defined as
follows:
Normal air filter replacement:
Should occur every 18 months in typical central office or controlled container (either
under-ground or above-ground, as long as the inlet to the environment is filtered,
and temperature/humidity are controlled and defined per the central office). The
external environment to the container/central office is a typical residential area,
and/or the air inside the container/central office has a typical central office quality.
Expedited air filter replacement:
Should occur every 12 months in a controlled environment central office or con-
trolled container (either under-ground or above-ground, as long as the inlet to the
environment is filtered, and temperature/humidity are controlled and defined per the
central office). This also means the external environment to the container/central
office is an industrial area, and/or the air inside the container/central office is below
a central office standard quality and where a construction is on-going, or there is a
micro filter or heavy tree dust (e.g., entering the environment).
Condensed air filter replacement:
Should occur every 6 months in a non-controlled environment in non-controlled con-
tainer (e.g., above-ground cabinet, or the basement of a high-rise) where the inlet to
the environment has poor filtering, and the temperature and humidity control is poor.
This also means the external environment to the container is a heavy industrial area,
and/or the air inside the container is significantly below a central office standard
quality. This also applies if a central office is located in a heavy industrial area where
a very heavy construction is on-going.
6.1.3 Connector Panel
The front-access Connector Panel (COPA) is located at the bottom of each shelf, as dis-
played in Figure 52.
!
Air filter replacement must be treated as a periodic maintenance procedure to ensure
that the fans are able to sustain optimum shelf-operating temperature. Therefore, the air
filter must be replaced every 18 months.
In heavily polluted (e.g., containers/central offices with construction activity) or dirty
environments, air filter replacement should occur every 6 or 12 months respectively. An
excessively dirty air filter will reduce cooling airflow.
Equipment must not be operated without fans. During fan or filter replacement, the
replacement part should be immediately reinserted after removing the fan or filter.


A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
89
Technical Description (TED) Mechanical design
Figure 52 Connector panel
The COPA connectors are listed in Table 43.
In addition, the bottom area of the shelf also contains an Earth Bonding Point (EBP) jack
for connection of a grounded wrist strap.
For complete instructions on all COPA cable connections, please refer to the Installation
and Test Manual (ITMN) of SURPASS hiT 7300.
6.2 Racks
The SURPASS hiT 7300 shelves are mounted in ANSI, standard or hiT 7300 ETSI
racks. One rack can accommodate up to three shelves.
g The standard ETSI racks can only be used in OLR NEs due to the small usable
cabling space in front of the rack beams.
Connector Name Connector Type Remarks
UBAT 1/3
UBAT 2/4
3W3 D-SUB
For connection of shelf DC operating voltage
(redundant power feeds from the rack Power
Distribution Panel (PDP)).
APSD IN
APSD OUT
8-pin RJ45
Input and output connectors for the line
amplifier card LSB (Not used in SON).
This signal is daisy-chained from shelf-to-
shelf via cable by using these connectors.
This is only required when an amplification
group (e.g., line amplifiers and/or Raman
pumps) has to be mounted in different
shelves.
M4 threaded stud Shelf grounding cable must be attached here.
Table 43 COPA connectors
UBAT 1/3 UBAT 2/4
APSD N APSD OUT
Ground stud
Jack for
grounded
wrist strap
!
The grounded wrist strap should always be worn when working on the shelf.
The use of a grounded wrist strap prevents electrostatic damage of components.


90 A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
Technical Description (TED) Mechanical design
6.2.1 Rack arrangements
Figure 53 displays examples of rack arrangements for standard 7-foot ANSI racks and
standard 2200 mm ETSI racks, respectively. Maximum densities are depicted.
Figure 53 Rack arrangements; ANSI 7-foot and ETSI 2200 mm racks
g Note that each UDCM tray occupies 2U and a TIF distribution panel occupies 1U
therefore, affecting the possible arrangements within one rack.
6.2.2 Power Distribution Panel
Each rack contains a PDP mounted near the top (see Figure 53). The PDP contains
fuses (or circuit breakers) to protect all the dual-redundant power feeds connected to
each shelf in the rack.
ANSI 7-foot racks
44 mounting units
1 x PDP (fuse panel)
3 x hiT 7300 Shelf
3 x Fiber tray
ETSI 2200 mm racks
82 mounting units
1 x PDP (breaker panel)
3 x hiT 7300 Shelf
3 x Fiber tray
PDP
(Fuse panel)
Fiber tray
hiT 7300
ANS shelf
Fiber tray
Fiber tray
hiT 7300
ANS shelf
hiT 7300
ANS shelf
PDP
(Breaker panel)
Fiber tray
hiT 7300
ETS shelf
Fiber tray
Fiber tray
hiT 7300
ETS shelf
hiT 7300
ETS shelf


A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
91
Technical Description (TED) Mechanical design
6.2.3 TIF distribution panel
The TIF distribution panel CTDP-1, can be mounted on ANSI or ETSI racks to allow an
easy and quick TIF interconnection between SURPASS hiT 7300 and StrataLight OTS-
4000 or MPBC RMH07 series.
Up to five OEM systems (StrataLight OTS-4000 or MPBC RMH07 series) can be con-
nected to the CTDP-1 (one per each extension port). The CTDP-1 collects three TIF
sensors (for MINOR, MAJOR and CRITICAL alarms) in each extension port IN x-x (with
the exception of the far right-hand extension port, which can carry four TIF sensors).
To allow a direct interconnection with SURPASS hiT 7300 CCEP-1 controller card a
single TIF connector TIF-IN 1-16 gathers all the 16 TIF sensors of the OEM systems
(see Figure 54).
Figure 54 CTDP-1 faceplate
The CTDP-1 connectors are listed in Table 44.
Connector Name Connector Type Remarks
IN 1-3 Male 9-pin D-SUB
First extension port input connector.
Carries three TIF sensors (1 to 3) from
StrataLight OTS-4000 or MPBC RMH07
series equipment.
IN 4-6 Male 9-pin D-SUB
Second extension port input connector.
Carries three TIF sensors (4 to 6) from
StrataLight OTS-4000 or MPBC RMH07
series equipment.
IN 7-9 Male 9-pin D-SUB
Third extension port input connector.
Carries three TIF sensors (7 to 9) from
StrataLight OTS-4000 or MPBC RMH07
series equipment.
IN 10-12 Male 9-pin D-SUB
Fourth extension port input connector.
Carries three TIF sensors (10 to 12) from
StrataLight OTS-4000 or MPBC RMH07
series equipment.
IN 13-16 Male 9-pin D-SUB
Fifth extension port input connector.
Carries four TIF sensors (13 to 16) from
StrataLight OTS-4000 or MPBC RMH07
series equipment.
Table 44 CTDP-1 connectors


92 A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
Technical Description (TED) Mechanical design
To interconnect the CTDP-1 with StrataLight OTS-4000 or MPBC RMH07 series equip-
ment, an individual cable between a CTDP-1 extension port and the OEM system TIF
output connector is required.
For a more detailed information about the cabling and pin assignment, please refer to
the Interconnect, Configuration and Mechanical Assembly (ICMA) of SURPASS hiT
7300.
6.3 Cards
Figure 55 displays the basic design of SURPASS hiT 7300 cards. Important points about
the SURPASS hiT 7300 cards are as follows:
Cards are installed in the shelfs 16-slot card area (displayed in Figure 50). Slots are
numbered 101 to 116 (1 to 16 on LCT), from left-to-right.
Slots 101 to 115 are all 30 mm wide and are dedicated to traffic cards. Many of the
SURPASS hiT 7300 traffic cards occupy only one 30 mm slot, while others span
multiple contiguous slots. These slots are not card-specific.
Slot 116 is 40 mm wide. Only the controller card can be installed in slot 116. The
CCEP-1 controller card is 70 mm wide and thus occupies slots 115 and 116 (see
chapter 6.3.4).
Coded connectors prevent inadvertently installing a traffic card in the controller card
slot or vice-versa.
Optical connectors, network management connectors, control elements, and LEDs
are mounted on the front panels of the card for easy access. Optical connectors are
LC/PC type.
Each plug-in card is securely held in the shelf via two captive screws. For easy
removal (after the captive screws are loosened), each card is equipped with top and
bottom extraction levers that aid in disengaging the card from its backplane connec-
tor.
Blank panels must be installed when a shelf is not fully-equipped with cards. All
empty slots must be equipped with a blank panel.
TIF-IN 1-16 Male 25-pin D-SUB
Output connector for interconnection with
SURPASS hiT 7300 TIF.
Aggregates the 16 TIF sensors (1 to 16)
from StrataLight OTS-4000 or MPBC
RMH07 series equipment.
M4 threaded stud
Panel grounding cable must be attached
here.
Not used in ETSI racks.
Connector Name Connector Type Remarks
Table 44 CTDP-1 connectors (Cont.)


A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
93
Technical Description (TED) Mechanical design
Figure 55 Cards design
For complete instructions on a safe and correct handling of all plug-in cards, please refer
to the Installation and Test Manual (ITMN) of SURPASS hiT 7300.
6.3.1 Blank panels and faceplates
Any card slot that remains empty, i.e., does not contain a card, must be equipped with
a blank panel for electromagnetic shielding.
All cards are equipped with individual faceplates in order to meet EMI/ESD objectives
and requirements, and ensure heat dissipation.
6.3.2 Card label
Each card is supplied with a specific card label placed in the top extraction lever (see
Figure 56).
Figure 56 Card label location
Faceplate
Extraction levers
PCB AREA
Card coding
connector
Backplane
connector
Card label
Top extraction lever


94 A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
Technical Description (TED) Mechanical design
The card label identifies the card and provides additional information such as manufac-
turing identification, production code number and card specific data.
For a more detailed information about the card labels, please refer to the Installation and
Test Manual (ITMN) of SURPASS hiT 7300.
6.3.3 Card faceplate LEDs
Each "active" card, i.e., those that contain an on-board processor, has a green OK LED
and a red Fault LED on its faceplate that indicates card status as explained in Table 45.
"Passive" cards (e.g., VOA, OChP, and some filter cards) do not have any LEDs.
g If the shelf is equipped with the optional front cover, the OK and Fault LEDs on the
cards in slots 101-115 are visible only when the cover is removed.
6.3.4 Controller card faceplate elements
The controller card faceplate contains the most important power-on and alarm LEDs as
well as several interfaces for dedicated connections.
Table 46 describes the available controller card variants.
LED name LED color Description
Fault red
When the Fault LED is ON, it indicates that the card has
detected an on-board hardware or software failure.
When the failure condition clears, the Fault LED is
extinguished.
A blinking Fault LED indicates a LOS communication
alarm on the line amplifier and transponder cards.
The Fault LED is powered by a backplane power bus,
ensuring that a card can light its Fault LED even if its own
on-board power supply fails.
OK green
When the OK LED is ON, it indicates that the card is
powered, operating fault-free, and is capable of carrying
traffic.
Table 45 Standard front LEDs
Card name Description
CCEP-1
(see Figure 57)
The CCEP-1 card is the NE controller card used
in the NE main shelf (001) and is supplied with TIF
module.
CCMP-1
The CCMP-1 card is the NE controller card used
in the NE main shelf (001) and is supplied without
TIF module.
Table 46 Controller card variants


A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
95
Technical Description (TED) Mechanical design
Figure 57 displays the CCEP-1 controller card faceplate which has an integrated TIF
module. The CCMP-1 and CCSP-1 controller cards share a similar faceplate but without
TIF module therefore, they cannot supervise/control particular events/devices at the
site.
Figure 57 CCEP-1 front panel
CCSP-1
The CCSP-1 card is the shelf controller card used
in the NE sub-shelves and is supplied without TIF
module.
Card name Description
Table 46 Controller card variants (Cont.)
Telemetry
nterface (TF)
connectors
Alarm Cut-Off
(ACO) LED
and button
Alarm and
status LEDs
EOW
connectors
Ethernet
connectors
TFmodule


96 A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
Technical Description (TED) Mechanical design
Table 47 describes all the controller card elements. All the power and alarm LEDs are
visible through a small cut-out even when the shelf front cover is mounted.
Interface label LED color Description
Fault red See Table 45
OK green See Table 45
UBAT 1 to 4 green Separate power-ON LEDs for the supply voltages.
COM-AL/CRIT red
Communication Alarm.
When active a Critical alarm exists in this shelf.
COM-AL/MAJ orange
Communication Alarm.
When active a Major alarm exists in this shelf.
COM-AL/MIN yellow
Communication Alarm.
When active a Minor alarm exists in this shelf.
EQUIP-AL/CRIT red
Equipment Alarm.
When active a Critical alarm exists in this shelf.
EQUIP-AL/MAJ orange
Equipment Alarm.
When active a Major alarm exists in this shelf.
EQUIP-AL/MIN yellow
Equipment Alarm.
When active a Minor alarm exists in this shelf.
INFO green/red
No function assigned.
Reserved for future use only.
- Handset connector (4-pin RJ22 connector).
EOW -
Shelf interconnector (4-pin D-SUB 9 connector)
with on-board buzzer.
Used to interconnect shelves in multi-degree NEs.
Can gather two EOW signals by using an
expansion Y 4-wire cable.
Not used in SON.
User 2 green
User channel connector (8-pin RJ45 connector).
Used for point-to-point user channel connection via
optical links.
Not used in SON
User 1 green
User channel connector (8-pin RJ45 connector).
Used for point-to-point user channel connection via
optical links.
Not used in SON
Table 47 Controller card interfaces


A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
97
Technical Description (TED) Mechanical design
ILAN 2 green
Ethernet LAN connector (8-pin RJ45 connector).
Used for connection between shelves within the
NE.
ILAN 1 green
Ethernet LAN connector (8-pin RJ45 connector).
Used for connection between shelves within the
NE.
Q green
Ethernet LAN connector (8-pin RJ45 connector).
Used for connection to a TMN system, internal
DCN access and shelves interconnection.
Note that in the CCSP-1 controller card this
interface is not usable.
QF green
Ethernet LAN connector (8-pin RJ45 connector).
Used for connection to LCT via a local Personal
Computer (PC).
Note that in the CCSP-1 controller card this
interface is not usable.
ACO blue
Alarm Cut-OFF indication LED.
Note that in the CCSP-1 and CCMP-1 controller
cards this interface is not available.
ACO -
Alarm Cut-OFF button.
Note that in the CCSP-1 and CCMP-1 controller
cards this interface is not available.
TIFIN -
TIF input connector (25-pin D-SUB 25 connector).
Used for alarm detection such as a door opening
alarm, temperature alarm, etc.
Note that in the CCSP-1 and CCMP-1 controller
cards this interface is not available.
TIFOUT/ALARM -
TIF output connector (25-pin D-SUB 25
connector).
Used for remote control of devices such as lights,
air conditioning etc., and for
equipment/communication alarm indication
purposes.
Note that in the CCSP-1 and CCMP-1 controller
cards this interface is not available.
Interface label LED color Description
Table 47 Controller card interfaces (Cont.)


98 A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
Technical Description (TED) System bring-up
7 System bring-up
This chapter provides some basic information about planning, installation and commis-
sioning of SURPASS hiT 7300.
7.1 Planning
The planning of a SURPASS hiT 7300 network is done by the SURPASS TransNet tool.
SURPASS TransNet is a sophisticated software simulation tool developed specifically
for designing and/or upgrading optical DWDM networks with SURPASS hiT 7300. It
runs on PCs using the Windows 2000 or Windows XP operating systems.
The SURPASS TransNet tool provides:
Drawing of network structures on a geographical map (see Figure 58).
Easy-to-understand user guidance features that take users through the steps of
designing a network and assigning equipment to the DWDM routes.
Guidance on how to plan connections, protection groups and aggregations.
All the necessary calculations in the network creation process.
Price-optimized routes for selection thanks to its cost optimization algorithms.
Optimum wavelength assignment, cost optimization and wavelength-dependent
reach.
Analysis, commissioning, NCF configuration files and equipment reports which give
a complete description of the necessary equipment and configuration steps of the
NEs.
Existing Nokia Siemens Networks optical networks to be extended and changed.
Support of generated network-related reports and of DWDM route-specific reports.


A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
99
Technical Description (TED) System bring-up
Figure 58 SURPASS TransNet network planning example
The SURPASS TransNet receives the network topology as input from the customer, the
connection traffic demands and constraints regarding the network and/or the
demands.The network topology generally indicates physical locations of the sites that
constitute the network, the distance between sites, the specifications of the optical fibers
installed in the network and an indication if the sites may be used as source or end of a
traffic demand. Traffic demands generally indicate the required traffic connections
between specific sites and the kind of services that these must support.
SURPASS TransNet considers the network topology, traffic demands and customer
constraints, and provides an optimized solution for the network using Nokia Siemens
Networks optical transport solutions or, if required, OEM products.
The optimized solution takes into account the analysis of physical and equipment con-
straints involved in the transmission of DWDM signals over optical fiber, the routing and
wavelength assignment of optical channels over multiple optical links within a meshed
optical network and the cost of equipment in controlled compromised selections, e.g.,
filter structure of an OADM according to BOL/EOL channel count.
SURPASS TransNet documents the optimized solution so that the customer has all the
required information for the analysis, procurement and commissioning of the equipment.
This allows the implementation of the optical network under analysis so that possible
errors are minimized and reliability is maximized.


100 A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
Technical Description (TED) System bring-up
For this purpose, SURPASS TransNet provides a procurement equipment list, a com-
missioning report (indicating how equipment should be installed and may include
cabling plan and slot assignment plan) and an NCF used for SURPASS hiT 7300 com-
missioning.
For detailed information and a step-by-step guide on all the SURPASS TransNet fea-
tures, please refer to the SURPASS TransNet customer documentation.
7.2 Delivery formats
SURPASS hiT 7300 system equipment can be delivered in three different formats as
described in the following sections.
Rack and Shelf Preconfiguration
The entire rack and shelf assembly is done by Nokia Siemens Networks. According to
the installer/commissioners list of material, all shelves are fully equipped with the nec-
essary cards and configured with shelf IDs, and consequently mounted in the racks.
The intra-rack electrical cabling (power and ground cabling) and the intra-rack routing of
optical fibers is also done by Nokia Siemens Networks.
Before delivering the complete assembly is tested by Nokia Siemens Networks.
Shelf Preconfiguration
The entire shelf assembly is done by Nokia Siemens Networks. All shelves are fully
equipped with cards according to the installer/commissioners list of material and con-
figured with shelf IDs, and consequently tested.
Shelves and racks are packed and delivered separately. The installing and equipping of
the racks is completed by the installer/commissioner on site.
Bulk delivery
All racks, shelves and cards are delivered separately. Assembling, cabling and config-
uration of the whole system equipment is performed by the installer/commissioner (see
chapters 7.3 and 7.4).
7.3 Installation
The installation of SURPASS hiT 7300 comprises shelves, racks and cable assembly.
SURPASS TransNet provides a list of material for the entire network and for each NE in
particular, and a bill of material of each DWDM route.
The assembly of all the cards, in each shelf, and all the cabling connections must be
based on SURPASS TransNet reports for a successful system installation and commis-
sioning.
For complete hardware installation instructions, please refer to the Installation and Test
Manual (ITMN) of SURPASS hiT 7300.
7.4 Commissioning
SURPASS hiT 7300 has to be configured on initial commissioning, prior to the regular
operation. NE and Optical Link commissioning is mandatory after all the racks and
shelves hardware are properly installed.


A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
101
Technical Description (TED) System bring-up
To perform the NE and Optical Link commissioning, SURPASS TransNet provides a set
of NCFs and a commissioning report, at the end of the network planning.
The NCFs contain most of the necessary configurations for each NE of the planned
network. However, several configurations (e.g., DCN and NE configurations) must be
performed manually with the support of the NE commissioning manuals.
For detailed information and a step-by-step guide on NEs and Optical Link commission-
ing of the SURPASS hiT 7300 system, please refer to the NE Commissioning and
Optical Link Commissioning (OLC) manuals.


102 A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
Technical Description (TED) Network management
8 Network management
This chapter provides an overview of the telecommunication network management
systems that can manage the SURPASS hiT 7300, including the access and security
management functions.
The Nokia Siemens Networks network management systems for optical networks are
designed for the needs of regional transport networks as well as for long distances
(national and international) networks.
The network management systems provide all the major network management func-
tions defined in the ITU-T standard M.3010 Principles for a Telecommunication Man-
agement Network.
Figure 59 Network management functions according to ITU-T
Based on ITU-T standard M.3010, the five functional areas fault, configuration, account-
ing, performance and security management can be distributed to the four layers as dis-
played in Figure 59.
The lowest layer of the network management functions is the element management
layer. Its functionality is to allow all system components and function units of an NE to
be monitored and handled (e.g., line cards with user ports, cross connect units, multiplex
modules), etc.
The network management layer includes all the functions required to manage the optical
network in an effective and user-friendly way, such as the visualization of the network
topology, creation of services, correlation of alarms to network resources.
Fault configuration and performance management are supported on the element man-
agement layer. Configuration and fault management is also provided on the network
management layer. Additional configuration, fault and performance management
features are available on the service management layer. Security management func-
Business management Iayer
Service management Iayer
Network management Iayer
Network
Management
EIement management Iayer
- Configuration of
sections/paths
- Network supervision
and control
- Section/path protection
- Control and
supervision of NEs
- Configuration of NEs
- Fault localization on
network management
layer
- Service order booking
- Subscriber
administration
- Client interface
- Budgeting
- Business planning
- nventory management


A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
103
Technical Description (TED) Network management
tions can be used to restrict access either to the user interfaces of the network manage-
ment system or to individual NEs.
8.1 SURPASS hiT 7300 Local Craft Terminal
The SURPASS hiT 7300 LCT enables the user to perform a wide variety of operation
administration, maintenance, and provisioning tasks for the SURPASS hiT 7300.
These include:
Fault management
Configuration management
Performance management
Security management
Optical link commissioning procedures
Equipment management
Software management
These SURPASS hiT 7300 LCT functions are provided via @CT, TNMS CT and TNMS
Core/CDM systems (see chapters 8.2, 8.3 and 8.4).
The PC requirements for running the LCT are listed in chapter 9.9.
For information on how to work with LCT, please refer to the Operating Manual (OMN)
of SURPASS hiT 7300.
8.2 @CT
@CT provides web access to NEs of SURPASS hiT 7300 in the customer network
without the use of a management system. It communicates via SNMP with the NEs and
uses File Transfer Protocol Secure (FTPS) for upload/download of software or other
data configuration, e.g., NCF and log files.
@CT is a Java Web Start application pre-installed on the controller card of an NE which
contains the LCT of the NE. The NE access via browser provides a link which allows the
@CT download, and the consequent launch of the LCT.
g @CT may be accessed locally via the QF Ethernet interface of the NE.
For a more detailed information, please refer to the @CT User Manual.
8.3 TNMS CT
TNMS CT is a transparent software platform for SDH and DWDM NEs using QD2, QST,
QST V2, Q3 or SNMP telegram protocols. It supports line, star, ring and mesh networks
and provides access to NEs via Ethernet interface or via a serial line interface (RS232).
There are two operation modes that provide access to the NE via TNMS CT:
Local Craft Terminal (LCT) mode, which is used for local management and commis-
sioning of NEs.
Network Craft Terminal (NCT) mode, which is used for either local or remote
network management.
Figure 60 displays an application example for craft terminals (in LCT and NCT modes)
in a transmission network.


104 A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
Technical Description (TED) Network management
Figure 60 Craft terminals in a transmission network
The NE functions are executed via the LCTs provided by the TMNS CT system.
TNMS CT is a scalable single-user system with a client/server architecture comprising
several industry standards with the Windows 2000 and Windows XP operating systems
and software applications. The client and server software can be installed either on dif-
ferent PCs or on one single PC.
For a more detailed information, please refer to the TNMS CT customer documentation.
8.4 TNMS Core/CDM
The telecommunication network management system TNMS Core/CDM is an integrated
solution designed for large, medium and small size networks. It supports NEs with
DWDM, OTH, SDH, PDH, Ethernet in line, star, ring and mesh network configurations.
TNMS Core/CDM can be used to manage networks in the access, edge, metro, core
and backbone levels.
The NEs of a transmission network provide various management interfaces so that they
can be connected to the management system via the DCN.
TNMS Core/CDM is a scalable, multi-user system with a client/server architecture com-
prising several industry standards with the Windows XP and Windows 2003 Server
operating systems and software applications.
The TNMS Core/CDM software includes the Client, SysAdmin, Server and NetServer
applications. Client and SysAdmin are installed on client PC.
Figure 61 displays the system architecture of TNMS Core/CDM.
NE 1
NE 2
NE 4 NE 5
NE 3
NE 7
NE 6
NE 9 NE 8
NE 10
NE 11
D
C
C
D
C
C
DCC
D
C
C
D
C
C
DCC
DCC
DCC
LCT
mode
LCT
mode
D
C
C
D
C
C
Possible
Connection
to TMN
NCT
mode
Q (LAN)
LCT monitoring areas
(NCT monitors all areas)
DCC: Data Communication Channel
QF
Q
F


A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
105
Technical Description (TED) Network management
Figure 61 System architecture of TNMS Core/CDM
The management system administrator can access the system via the SysAdmin client,
while the operator can use the TNMS Core/CDM client interface. Different communica-
tion drivers (Q3, QST, SNMP or QD2) are provided for communication with the gateway
NEs.
For a more detailed information, please refer to the TNMS Core/CDM customer docu-
mentation.
8.5 Access and security management
The following sub-chapters provide relevant information on access and security man-
agement.
8.5.1 Network Element access management
Several management systems (see chapters 8.2, 8.3 and 8.4) are allowed to establish
connections to the NE at the same time. Operations (non-modifying as well as modify-
ing) can be requested by management systems in parallel without the need to explicitly
request write access before.
To ensure data consistency between all NEs and all the connected management
systems, the NE sends notifications to all the connected management systems as a
result of any modifying operation, which has been successfully performed in the NE.
TNMS Core/CDM
Client
SysAdmin
Server
SysAdmin
Client PCs Server PC
NetServer
NetServer PCs
Large Network
Client
SysAdmin
NetServer NetServer
TNMS Core/CDM TNMS Core/CDM
TNMS Core/CDM TNMS Core/CDM TNMS Core/CDM
NEs
NEs NEs


106 A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
Technical Description (TED) Network management
8.5.2 User security management and access control
For system access control via SNMPv3 protocol the application layer implements
password-based client authentication. Each time an SNMPv3 operation is requested,
the provided client authentication with the corresponding SNMPv3 PDU is verified.
The SNMPv3 protocol provides enhanced security rules, such as:
Change the password of an existing user.
Add more users for SNMPv3 agents using User-based Security Model (USM).
Enable authorization in SNMPv3 using View-based Access Control Model (VACM).
However, a modification of access rights using the SNMPv3 interface is not sup-
ported.
g Security and configuration data are stored in persistent logs.
8.6 Network management interfaces and architecture
The following sub-chapters provide information regarding the interfaces and architec-
ture of the SURPASS hiT 7300 network management software.
8.6.1 Interfaces
Figure 62 displays an overview of the network management systems and interfaces that
can be used to manage the SURPASS hiT 7300 via the Q and QF Ethernet interfaces
using SNMPv3, Hyper Text Transfer Protocol (HTTP) and FTPS protocols.
Figure 62 Network management interfaces
The Q Ethernet interface allows the SURPASS hiT 7300 system to be connected to a
TMN system, e.g., TNMS CT. If the Q Ethernet interface is used for DCN interconnection
with another NE, no IP is assigned to the Q Ethernet interface.
The QF Ethernet interface has a default IP address that provides access to the NE LCT.
The terminal obtains its IP address from a DHCP server on the NE.
g TMN systems can also be connected via QF Ethernet interface if necessary
(dashed lines in Figure 62). This configurations must be performed by advanced
users only.
@CT
(HTTP/SNMPv3)
TNMS CT
(SNMPv3)
TNMS Core/CDM
(SNMPv3)
SURPASS hiT 7300
QF Q
DCC
P P
P
P
P P
DCC
P
QF Q
SURPASS hiT 7300


A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
107
Technical Description (TED) Network management
8.6.2 Architecture
The TMN managing systems (TNMS Core/CDM and TNMS CT) connect to the
SURPASS hiT 7300 network via permanent gateway NEs. The gateway function can be
activated on any NE, during the NE commissioning procedures, without the need of
additional hardware.
For detailed instructions on how to activate a gateway NE function, please refer to the
Commissioning manual.
The following example of network management architecture displayed in Figure 63,
illustrates the usage of SURPASS hiT 7300 network management systems via the NE
gateway.
Figure 63 TMN systems connection via gateway NE
TNMS CT TNMS Core/CDM
P P
P
SURPASS hiT 7300
DCC
gateway NE
SURPASS hiT 7300
DCC


108 A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
Technical Description (TED) Technical data
9 Technical data
This chapter lists technical data of SURPASS hiT 7300 equipment.
9.1 Physical layers
The following tables list important technical data about the physical layers of the
SURPASS hiT 7300system.
General information
Maximum number of
channels
40 (32 channels for long single spans)
Bit rate/line coding
of optical line signals
40 Gbit/s Duo-binary and DPSK (via StrataLight OTS-4000)
10 Gbit/s NRZ
2.5 Gbit/s NRZ
Maximum
bit error ratio (BER)
10
-11
to 10
-16
; typ.: 10
-12
Supported fiber
types
SSMF, LEAF, MDF, TW-C, DSF and PSCF fiber according to
ITU-T G.652, G.653, G.654 and G.655 DMC
(PSCF for long single spans only)
Wavelength Grid compliant to ITU-T G.692
Table 48 Physical layers, general information
Interface at point MPI-SM
Point MPI-SM A multichannel reference point on the optical fiber just
after the optical output connector of the NE transport
interface.
Maximum mean channel
output power
without external pumps: -15 to 1 dBm
(depending on span reach)
with external pumps: 6 dBm
Minimum mean channel
output power
-15 to -4 dBm (depending on span reach)
Maximum single channel
output power in long single
spans
18 dBm
Maximum composite power in
long single spans
30 dBm
Maximum mean total output
power of each wavelength
C-band
without external pumps: 7 to 17 dBm
(depending of span reach)
with external pumps: 22 dBm
Table 49 Physical layers, interface at point MPI-S
M


A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
109
Technical Description (TED) Technical data
Central frequency compliant to ITU-T G.694.1
Channel spacing 100 GHz
Maximum central frequency
deviation
12.5 GHz
Minimum channel extinction
ratio
8.2 dB
Optical path from point MPI-S
M
to point MPI-R
M
Point MPI-S
M
A multichannel reference point on the optical fiber just
after the optical output connector of the NE transport
interface.
Point MPI-R
M
A multichannel reference point on the optical fiber just
after the optical input connector of the NE transport
interface.
Maximum span attenuation 14 to 43 dB (depending on span reach)
Minimum span attenuation 3 to 27 dB (depending on span reach)
Maximum span attenuation for
long single spans
65 dB (at EOL)
Minimum optical return loss -18 dB to -24 dB (depending on span reach)
Maximum discrete reflectance -19 dB to -22 dB (depending on span reach)
Maximum differential group
delay
10Gbit/s signals: 40 ps for 2 dB OSNR penalty
2.5 Gbit/s signals: 160 ps for 2 dB OSNR penalty
Table 50 Physical layers, optical path (single span) from point MPI-S
M
to
point MPI-RM
Interface at point MPI-R
M
Point MPI-R
M
A multichannel reference point on the optical fiber just
after the optical input connector of the NE transport
interface.
Maximum mean channel input
power
-16 dBm
Minimum mean channel input
power
-30 dBm
Maximum mean total input
power
0 dBm
Table 51 Physical layers, interface at point MPI-R
M
Interface at point MPI-S
M
Table 49 Physical layers, interface at point MPI-SM (Cont.)


110 A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
Technical Description (TED) Technical data
9.2 Interfaces
The following sub-chapters provide information about the SURPASS hiT 7300 line,
client and management interfaces.
9.2.1 Line interfaces
The following tables list important technical data about the line interfaces of the
SURPASS hiT 7300transponder cards.
For transponder card data, see chapter 9.3.12.
Maximum channel power
difference
10 dB
Maximum optical path penalty 3 to 5 dB
Interface at point MPI-R
M
Table 51 Physical layers, interface at point MPI-R
M
(Cont.)
DWDM-SFP specifications
(standard version)
Connector LC/PC
Modulation format NRZ
Data rate 255/238*2.48832 = 2.666057 Gbit/s
Wavelength range
100 GHz channel grid in the C-band:
192.10 - 196.00 THz (wavelength selected)
Wavelength stability 12.5 GHz (100 pm)
Modulated spectral width
(-20dB)
0.5 nm
Side mode suppression ratio > 30 dB
Output power -1 dBm to +4 dBm
Output power stability 1 dB
Extinction ratio > 8.2 dB at rated output power
Jitter performance Acc. ITU G.8251
BOL Rx OSNR/0.1 nm without
margin for temperature/ageing
dispersion/PMD/PDL
12.3 dB for BER = 10
-13
with FEC (standard G.709)
(preFEC.~10
-4
), Back-to-Back
Input power -10 dBm to -28 dBm
Maximum input power -5 dBm
Dispersion tolerance -800 ps/nm to +1600 ps/nm for 2 dB OSNR penalty
Table 52 DWDM-SFP (2.5G) (standard version) optical line
interface specifications


A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
111
Technical Description (TED) Technical data
Enhanced DWDM-SFP specifications
(with extended dispersion tolerance and output power)
Connector LC/PC
Modulation format NRZ
Data rate 255/238*2.48832 = 2.666057 Gbit/s
Wavelength range
100 GHz channel grid in the C-band:
192.10 - 196.00 THz (wavelength selected)
Wavelength stability 12.5 GHz (100 pm)
Modulated spectral width
(-20dB)
0.5 nm
Side mode suppression ratio > 30 dB
Output power +4 dBm to +7 dBm
Output power stability 1 dB
Extinction ratio > 8.2 dB at rated output power
Jitter performance Acc. ITU G.8251
BOL Rx OSNR/0.1 nm without
margin for temperature/ageing
dispersion/PMD/PDL
12.3 dB for BER = 10
-13
with FEC (standard G.709)
(preFEC.~10
-4
), Back-to-Back
Input power -10 dBm to -28 dBm
Maximum input power -5 dBm
Dispersion tolerance -1600 ps/nm to +3500 ps/nm for 2 dB OSNR penalty
Table 53 DWDM-SFP with extended dispersion tolerance (2.5G) optical line
interface specifications
CWDM-SFP C8S1-0D2 and C8S1-1D2 specifications
Connector LC/PC
Modulation format NRZ
Data rate
C8S1-0D2: 1.06 to 1.25 Gbit/s
C8S1-1D2: 2.13 to 2.67 Gbit/s
Wavelength range 1471 to 1611 nm with 20 nm channel spacing
Wavelength stability 6.5 nm
Modulated spectral width
(-20dB)
1.0 nm
Side mode suppression ratio > 30 dB
Output power 0 dBm to +5 dBm
Extinction ratio 8.2 dB at rated output power
Table 54 CWDM-SFP C8S1-0D2 and C8S1-1D2 optical line interface specifications


112 A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
Technical Description (TED) Technical data
g Note that the DWDM SFP modules, with extended dispersion, are only available for
SON passive applications.
Jitter performance Acc. ITU G.8251
Sensitivity -18 dB
Input power 0 dBm to -18 dBm
Maximum input power +3 dBm
Dispersion tolerance -330 ps/nm to +1000 ps/nm for 1.5 dB OSNR penalty
CWDM-SFP C8L1-0D2 and C8L1-1D2 specifications
Connector LC/PC
Modulation format NRZ
Data rate
C8L1-0D2: 1.06 to 1.25 Gbit/s
C8L1-1D2: 2.13 to 2.67 Gbit/s
Wavelength range 1471 to 1611 nm with 20 nm channel spacing
Wavelength stability 6.5 nm
Modulated spectral width
(-20dB)
1.0 nm
Side mode suppression ratio > 30 dB
Output power 0 dBm to +5 dBm
Extinction ratio 8.2 dB at rated output power
Jitter performance Acc. ITU G.8251
Sensitivity -28 dB
Input power -9 dBm to -28 dBm
Maximum input power -5 dBm
Dispersion tolerance -530 ps/nm to +1600 ps/nm for 2 dB OSNR penalty
Table 55 CWDM-SFP C8L1-0D2 and C8L1-1D2 optical line interface specifications
10G/Regio MSA300 interface specifications
(I01T10G-1 Regio and I08T10G-1 Regio transponders)
Connector LC/PC
Modulation format NRZ
Data rate
262/237 * 9.95328 = 11.00320 Gbit/s and up to
262/238 * 10.3125 = 11.3524 Gbit/s
Table 56 MSA300 (10G) Regio optical line interface specifications
CWDM-SFP C8S1-0D2 and C8S1-1D2 specifications
Table 54 CWDM-SFP C8S1-0D2 and C8S1-1D2 optical line interface specifications


A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
113
Technical Description (TED) Technical data
Framing OTU2 acc. to G.709v2
Wavelength range
100 GHz channel grid in the C-band:
191.70 - 196.10 THz, wavelength selected
Wavelength stability 12.5 GHz (100 pm)
Side mode suppression ratio > 30 dB
Output power -1 dBm to +2 dBm
Output power stability 0.5 dB
Extinction ratio > 8.2 dB at rated output power
Jitter performance Acc. ITU G.8251
BOL Rx OSNR/0.1 nm without
margin for temperature/ageing
dispersion/PMD/PDL
12.9 dB for BER =10
-13
proprietary S-FEC
(preFEC. 4*10
-3
), Back-to-Back
Input power -14 dBm to -2 dBm
Maximum input power
+1 dBm, without permanent degradation of the BOL
receiver OSNR
Dispersion tolerance -400 ps/nm to +800 ps/nm for 2 dB OSNR penalty
Decision threshold level Supports continuous decision threshold optimization
10G/LH MSA300 specifications
(I01T10G-1 LH and I08T10G-1 LH transponders)
Connector LC/PC
Modulation format NRZ
Modulator pre-chirp 00.2
Data rate
262/237 * 9.95328 = 11.00320 Gbit/s and up to
262/238 * 10.3125 = 11.3524 Gbit/s
Framing OTU2 acc. to G.709v2
Wavelength range
100 GHz channel grid in the C-band:
191.70 - 196.00 THz tunable to C-band via I
2
C bus
Note that 50GHz spacing is not usable with
SURPASS hiT 7300 DWDM link. Only applicable for
SON
Wavelength stability 2.5 GHz (20 pm)
Laser line width
(unmodulated)
< 100 MHz
Side mode suppression ratio > 40 dB
Table 57 MSA300 (10G) LH optical line interface specifications
10G/Regio MSA300 interface specifications
(I01T10G-1 Regio and I08T10G-1 Regio transponders)
Table 56 MSA300 (10G) Regio optical line interface specifications (Cont.)


114 A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
Technical Description (TED) Technical data
Output power -0.7 dBm to +1.7 dBm
Output power stability 0.5 dB
Extinction ratio > 12 dB at rated output power (without filter)
SBS suppression peak-to-peak FM modulation 200 MHz to 1 GHz
Jitter performance Acc. ITU G.8251
BOL Rx OSNR/0.1 nm without
margin for temperature/ageing
dispersion/PMD/PDL
10.5 dB for BER = 10
-13
proprietary S-FEC (preFEC.
4*10
-3
), Back-to-Back
Input power -14 dBm to -2 dBm
Maximum input power +1 dBm
Dispersion tolerance 800 ps/nm to +800 ps/nm for 2 dB OSNR penalty
PMD tolerance 35 ps total DGD for 2 dB OSNR penalty
Decision threshold level Supports continuous decision threshold optimization
10G/LHD MSA300 with MLSE specifications
(I01T10G-1 LHD and I08T10G-1 LHD transponders)
Connector LC/PC
Modulation format NRZ
Modulator pre-chirp 00.2
Data rate
262/237 * 9.95328 = 11.00320 Gbit/s and up to
262/238 * 10.3125 = 11.3524 Gbit/s
Framing OTU2 acc. to G.709v2
Wavelength range
50 GHz channel grid in the C-band:
191.70 - 196.00 THz tunable to C-band via I
2
C bus
Note that 50GHz spacing is not usable with
SURPASS hiT 7300 DWDM link. Only applicable for
SON
Wavelength stability 2.5 GHz (20 pm)
Laser line width
(unmodulated)
< 100 MHz
Side mode suppression ratio > 40 dB
Output power -1.0 dBm to +2.0 dBm
Output power stability 0.8 dB
Extinction ratio > 12 dB at rated output power (without filter)
Table 58 MSA300 (10G) MLSE optical line interface specifications
10G/LH MSA300 specifications
(I01T10G-1 LH and I08T10G-1 LH transponders)
Table 57 MSA300 (10G) LH optical line interface specifications (Cont.)


A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
115
Technical Description (TED) Technical data
9.2.2 Client interfaces
The following tables list important technical data about the client interfaces of the
SURPASS hiT 7300 transponder cards.
For transponder card data see, chapter 9.3.12.
SBS suppression peak-to-peak FM modulation 200 MHz to 1 GHz
Jitter performance Acc. ITU G.8251
BOL Rx OSNR/0.1 nm without
margin for temperature/ageing
dispersion/PMD/PDL
11 dB for BER = 10
-13
proprietary S-FEC (preFEC.
4*10
-3
), Back-to-Back
Input power -14 dBm to -2 dBm
Maximum input power +1 dBm
Dispersion tolerance -1500 ps/nm to +1500 ps/nm for 2 dB OSNR penalty
PMD tolerance 50 ps total DGD for 2 dB OSNR penalty
10G/LHD MSA300 with MLSE specifications
(I01T10G-1 LHD and I08T10G-1 LHD transponders)
Table 58 MSA300 (10G) MLSE optical line interface specifications (Cont.)
GbE SFP specifications
Connector LC
Fiber type Acc. to ITU-T G.652
Operating wavelength range
1000BASE-SX: 770-860 nm
1000BASE-LX: 1270-1355 nm
1000BASE-ZX: 1500-1580 nm
CWDM C8S1-0D2: 8 CWDM wavelengths
CWDM C8L1-0D2: 8 CWDM wavelengths
DWDM-SFP: 40 DWDM wavelengths
Enhanced DWDM-SFP: 40 DWDM wavelengths
Required extinction ratio
1000BASE-SX: 9 dB
1000BASE-LX: 9 dB
1000BASE-ZX: 9 dB
CWDM C8S1-0D2: 8.2 dB
CWDM C8L1-0D2: 8.2 dB
DWDM: 8.2 dB
Enhanced DWDM: 8.2 dB
Table 59 GbE SFP optical client interfaces specifications


116 A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
Technical Description (TED) Technical data
Minimum optical return loss
1000BASE-SX: NA
1000BASE-LX: NA
1000BASE-ZX: 24 dB
CWDM C8S1-0D2: 24 dB
CWDM C8L1-0D2: 24 dB
DWDM: 24 dB
Enhanced DWDM: 24 dB
Maximum discrete reflectance
1000BASE-SX: NA
1000BASE-LX: NA
1000BASE-ZX: -27 dB
CWDM C8S1-0D2: -27 dB
CWDM C8L1-0D2: -27 dB
DWDM: -27 dB
Enhanced DWDM: -27 dB
Maximum input power overload
1000BASE-SX: 0 dBm
1000BASE-LX: -3 dBm
1000BASE-ZX: -3 dBm
CWDM C8S1-0D2: 0 dBm
CWDM C8L1-0D2: -9 dBm
DWDM: -10 dBm
Enhanced DWDM: -10 dBm
Minimum input sensitivity
1000BASE-SX: -17 dBm
1000BASE-LX: -19 dBm
1000BASE-ZX: -23 dBm
CWDM C8S1-0D2: -18 dBm
CWDM C8L1-0D2: -28 dBm
DWDM: -28 dBm
Enhanced DWDM: -28 dBm
Maximum output launch power
1000BASE-SX: 0 dBm
1000BASE-LX: -3 dBm
1000BASE-ZX: +5 dBm
CWDM C8S1-0D2: +5 dBm
CWDM C8L1-0D2: +5 dBm
DWDM: 4 dBm
Enhanced DWDM: 7 dBm
Maximum optical path penalty
1000BASE-SX: NA
1000BASE-LX: NA
1000BASE-ZX: 2 dB
CWDM C8S1-0D2: 1.5 dB
CWDM C8L1-0D2: 2.5 dB
DWDM: 2 dB
Enhanced DWDM: 2 dB
GbE SFP specifications
Table 59 GbE SFP optical client interfaces specifications (Cont.)


A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
117
Technical Description (TED) Technical data
Maximum reflectance of receiver
1000BASE-SX: -12 dB
1000BASE-LX: -12 dB
1000BASE-ZX: -27 dB
CWDM C8S1-0D2: -27 dB
CWDM C8L1-0D2: -27 dB
DWDM: -27 dB
Enhanced DWDM: -27 dB
Attenuation
1000BASE-SX: 0 to 7.5 dB
1000BASE-LX: 0 to 7.5 dB
1000BASE-ZX: 8 to 21 dB
CWDM C8S1-0D2: 16.5 dB
CWDMC8L1-0D2: 25.5 dB
DWDM: 25dB
Enhanced DWDM: 30 dB
Electrical GbE (1000BASE-T)
Cabling CAT 5 (or better) according to IEEE802.3 clause 40
Common mode voltage 50 mV
Return loss 16 dB
Table 60 Electrical GbE client interfaces specifications
10GbE XFP specifications
Connector LC
Fiber type SMF (MMF for 10GbE-SR/SW)
Operating wavelength range
10GbE-SR/SW: 840-860 nm
10GbE-LR/LW: 1260-1355 nm
10GbE-ER/EW: 1530-1565 nm
10GbE-ZR/ZW: 1530-1565 nm
Required extinction ratio
10GbE-SR/SW: 3 dB
10GbE-LR/LW: 3.5 dB
10GbE-ER/EW: 3 dB
10GbE-ZR/ZW: 9 dB
Minimum optical return loss
10GbE-SR/SW: 12 dB
10GbE-LR/LW: 12 dB
10GbE-ER/EW: 21 dB
10GbE-ZR/ZW: 27 dB
Table 61 10GbE XFP optical client interfaces specifications
GbE SFP specifications
Table 59 GbE SFP optical client interfaces specifications (Cont.)


118 A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
Technical Description (TED) Technical data
Mean input power overload
10GbE-SR/SW: -1 dBm
10GbE-LR/LW: 0.5 dBm
10GbE-ER/EW: -1 dBm
10GbE-ZR/ZW: -7 dBm
Minimum input sensitivity
10GbE-SR/SW: -11.1 dBm
10GbE-LR/LW: -12.6 dBm
10GbE-ER/EW: -14.1 dBm
10GbE-ZR/ZW: -24 dBm
Maximum output launch power
10GbE-SR/SW: -1 dBm
10GbE-LR/LW: 0.5 dBm
10GbE-ER/EW: 4 dBm
10GbE-ZR/ZW: 4 dBm
Maximum optical path penalty
10GbE-SR/SW: NA
10GbE-LR/LW: 3.2 dB
10GbE-ER/EW: 3 dB
10GbE-ZR/ZW: 2 dB
Maximum reflectance of receiver
10GbE-SR/SW: -12 dB
10GbE-LR/LW: -12 dB
10GbE-ER/EW: -26 dB
10GbE-ZR/ZW: -27 dB
Attenuation
10GbE-SR/SW: 1.6 to 2.6 dB
10GbE-LR/LW: 0 to 6.2 dB
10GbE-ER/EW: 5 to 10.9 dB
10GbE-ZR/ZW: 11 to 22 dB
STM-16/OC-48 SFP specifications
Connector LC
Fiber type ITU-T G.652/G.653
Operating wavelength range
I-16/SR: 1266-1360 nm
S-16.1/IR-1: 1260-1360 nm
L-16.1/LR-1: 1280-1335 nm
L-16.2/LR-2: 1500-1580 nm
CWDM C8S1-1D2: 8 CWDM wavelengths
CWDM C8L1-1D2: 8 CWDM wavelengths
DWDM-SFP: 40 DWDM wavelengths
Enhanced DWDM-SFP: 40 DWDM wavelengths
Table 62 STM-16/OC-48 optical client interfaces specifications
10GbE XFP specifications
Table 61 10GbE XFP optical client interfaces specifications (Cont.)


A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
119
Technical Description (TED) Technical data
Required extinction ratio
I-16/SR: 8.2 dB
S-16.1/IR-1: 8.2 dB
L-16.1/LR-1: 8.2 dB
L-16.2/LR-2: 8.2 dB
CWDM C8S1-1D2: 8.2 dB
CWDM C8L1-1D2: 8.2 dB
DWDM: 8.2 dB
Enhanced DWDM: 8.2 dB
Minimum optical return loss
I-16/SR: 24 dB
S-16.1/IR-1: 24 dB
L-16.1/LR-1: 24 dB
L-16.2/LR-2: 24 dB
CWDM C8S1-1D2: 24 dB
CWDM C8L1-1D2: 24 dB
DWDM: 24 dB
Enhanced DWDM: 24 dB
Maximum discrete reflectance
I-16/SR: -27 dB
S-16.1/IR-1: -27 dB
L-16.1/LR-1: -27 dB
L-16.2/LR-2: -27 dB
CWDM C8S1-1D2: -27 dB
CWDM C8L1-1D2: -27 dB
DWDM: -27 dB
Enhanced DWDM: -27 dB
Minimum input power overload
I-16/SR: -3 dBm
S-16.1/IR-1: 0 dBm
L-16.1/LR-1: -9 dBm
L-16.2/LR-2: -9 dBm
CWDM C8S1-1D2: 0 dBm
CWDM C8L1-1D2: -9 dBm
DWDM: -10 dBm
Enhanced DWDM: -10 dBm
Minimum input sensitivity
I-16/SR: -18 dBm
S-16.1/IR-1: -18 dBm
L-16.1/LR-1: -27 dBm
L-16.2/LR-2: -28 dBm
CWDM C8S1-1D2: -18 dBm
CWDM C8L1-1D2: -28 dBm
DWDM: -28 dBm
Enhanced DWDM: -28 dBm
STM-16/OC-48 SFP specifications
Table 62 STM-16/OC-48 optical client interfaces specifications (Cont.)


120 A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
Technical Description (TED) Technical data
Maximum output launch power
I-16/SR: -3 dBm
S-16.1/IR-1: 0 dBm
L-16.1LR-1: 3 dBm
L-16.2/LR-2: 3 dBm
C8S1-1D2: 5 dBm
C8L1-1D2: 5 dBm
DWDM: 4 dBm
Enhanced DWDM: 7 dBm
Maximum optical path penalty
I-16/SR: 1 dB
S-16.1/IR-1: 1 dB
L-16.1/LR-1: 1 dB
L-16.2/LR-2: 2 dB
CWDM C8S1-1D2: 1.5 dB
CWDM C8L1-1D2: 2.5 dB
DWDM: 2 dB
Enhanced DWDM: 2 dB
Maximum reflectance of receiver
I-16/SR: -27 dB
S-16.1/IR-1: -27 dB
L-16.1/LR-1: -27 dB
L-16.2/LR-2: -27 dB
CWDM C8S1-1D2: -27 dB
CWDM C8L1-1D2: -27 dB
DWDM: -27 dB
Enhanced DWDM: -27 dB
Attenuation
I-16/SR: 0 to 7 dB
S-16.1/IR-1: 0 to 12 dB
L-16.1/LR-1: 10 to 24 dB
L-16.2/LR-2: 10 to 24 dB
CWDM C8S1-1D2: 16.5 dB
CWDM C8L1-1D2: 25.5 dB
DWDM: 25dB
Enhanced DWDM: 30 dB
STM-64/OC-192 SFP specifications
Connector LC
Fiber type ITU-T G.652/G.653
Operating wavelength range
I-64.1/SR-1: 1290-1330 nm
S-64.2/IR-2b: 1530-1565 nm
P1L1-2D2: 1530-1565 nm
Table 63 STM-64/OC-192 optical client interfaces specifications
STM-16/OC-48 SFP specifications
Table 62 STM-16/OC-48 optical client interfaces specifications (Cont.)


A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
121
Technical Description (TED) Technical data
Required extinction ratio
I-64.1/SR-1: 6 dB
S-64.2b/IR-2b: 8.2 dB
P1L1-2D2: 9 dB
Minimum optical return loss
I-64.1/SR-1: 14 dB
S-64.2b/IR-2b: 24 dB
P1L1-2D2: 24 dB
Maximum discrete reflectance
I-64.1/SR-1: -27 dB
S-64.2b/IR-2b: -27 dB
P1L1-2D2: -27 dB
Mean input power overload
I-64.1/SR-1: -1 dBm
S-64.2b/IR-2b: -1 dBm
P1L1-2D2: -7 dBm
Minimum input sensitivity
I-64.1/SR-1: -11 dBm
S-64.2b/IR-2b: -14 dBm
P1L1-2D2: -24 dBm
Maximum output launch power
I-64.1/SR-1: -1 dBm
S-64.2b/IR-2b: 2 dBm
P1L1-2D2: 4 dBm
Maximum optical path penalty
I-64.1/SR-1: 1 dB
S-64.2b/IR-2b: 2 dB
P1L1-2D2: 2 dB
Maximum reflectance of receiver
I-64.1/SR-1: -14 dB
S-64.2b/IR-2b: -27 dB
P1L1-2D2: -27 dB
Attenuation
I-64.1/SR-1: 0 to 4 dB
S-64.2b/IR-2b: 3 to 11 dB
P1L1-2D2: 11 to 22 dB
OTU1 SFP specifications
Connector LC
Fiber type ITU-T G.652/G.653
Operating wavelength range
P1I1-1D1:1266-1360 nm
P1S1-1D1: 1260-1360 nm
P1L1-1D1: 1280-1335 nm
P1L1-1D2:1500-1580 nm
CWDM C8S1-1D2: 8 CWDM wavelengths
CWDM C8L1-1D2: 8 CWDM wavelengths
DWDM-SFP: 40 DWDM wavelengths
Enhanced DWDM-SFP: 40 DWDM wavelengths
Table 64 OTU1 optical client interfaces specifications
STM-64/OC-192 SFP specifications
Table 63 STM-64/OC-192 optical client interfaces specifications (Cont.)


122 A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
Technical Description (TED) Technical data
Required extinction ratio
P1I1-1D1: 8.2 dB
P1S1-1D1: 8.2 dB
P1L1-1D1: 8.2 dB
P1L1-1D2: 8.2 dB
CWDM C8S1-1D2: 8.2 dB
CWDM C8L1-1D2: 8.2 dB
DWDM: 8.2 dB
Enhanced DWDM: 8.2 dB
Minimum optical return loss
P1I1-1D1: 14 dB
P1S1-1D1: 14 dB
P1L1-1D1: 24 dB
P1L1-1D2: 24 dB
CWDM C8S1-1D2: 24 dB
CWDM C8L1-1D2: 24 dB
DWDM: 24 dB
Enhanced DWDM: 24 dB
Maximum discrete reflectance
P1I1-1D1: -27 dB
P1S1-1D1: -27 dB
P1L1-1D1: -27 dB
P1L1-1D2: -27 dB
CWDM C8S1-1D2: -27 dB
CWDM C8L1-1D2: -27 dB
DWDM: -27 dB
Enhanced DWDM: -27 dB
Mean input power overload
P1I1-1D1: -3 dBm
P1S1-1D1: 0 dBm
P1L1-1D1: -9 dBm
P1L1-1D2: -9 dBm
CWDM C8S1-1D2: 0 dBm
CWDM C8L1-1D2: -9 dBm
DWDM: -10 dBm
Enhanced DWDM: -10 dBm
Minimum input sensitivity
P1I1-1D1: -17 dBm
P1S1-1D1: -17 dBm
P1L1-1D1: -25 dBm
P1L1-1D2: -27 dBm
CWDM C8S1-1D2: -18 dBm
CWDM C8L1-1D2: -28 dBm
DWDM: -28 dBm
Enhanced DWDM: -28 dBm
OTU1 SFP specifications
Table 64 OTU1 optical client interfaces specifications (Cont.)


A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
123
Technical Description (TED) Technical data
Maximum output launch power
P1I1-1D1: -3 dBm
P1S1-1D1: 0 dBm
P1L1-1D1: 3 dBm
P1L1-1D2: 3 dBm
CWDM C8S1-1D2: 5 dBm
CWDM C8L1-1D2: 5 dBm
DWDM: 4 dBm
Enhanced DWDM: 7 dBm
Maximum optical path penalty
P1I1-1D1: 1 dB
P1S1-1D1: 1 dB
P1L1-1D1: 1 dB
P1L1-1D2: 3 dB
CWDM C8S1-1D2: 1.5 dB
CWDM C8L1-1D2: 2.5 dB
DWDM: 2 dB
Enhanced DWDM: 2 dB
Maximum reflectance of receiver
P1I1-1D1: -14 dB
P1S1-1D1: -14 dB
P1L1-1D1: -27 dB
P1L1-1D2: -27 dB
CWDM C8S1-1D2: -27 dB
CWDM C8L1-1D2: -27 dB
DWDM: -27 dB
Enhanced DWDM: -27 dB
Attenuation
P1I1-1D1: 0 to 6 dB
P1S1-1D1: 0 to 11 dB
P1L1-1D1: 10 to 22 dB
P1L1-1D2: 10 to 22 dB
CWDM C8S1-1D2: 16.5 dB
CWDM C8L1-1D2: 25.5 dB
DWDM: 25 dB
Enhanced DWDM: 30 dB
OTU2 SFP specifications
Connector LC
Fiber type ITU-T G.652/G.653
Operating wavelength range
P1I1-2D1: 1290-1330 nm
P1S1-2D2b: 1530-1565 nm
P1L1-2D2: 1530-1565 nm
Table 65 OTU2 optical client interfaces specifications
OTU1 SFP specifications
Table 64 OTU1 optical client interfaces specifications (Cont.)


124 A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
Technical Description (TED) Technical data
Required extinction ratio
P1I1-2D1: 6 dB
P1S1-2D2b: 8.2 dB
P1L1-2D2: 9 dB
Minimum optical return loss
P1I1-2D1: 14 dB
P1S1-2D2b: 24 dB
P1L1-2D2: 24 dB
Maximum discrete reflectance
P1I1-2D1: -27 dB
P1S1-2D2b: -27 dB
P1L1-2D2: -27 dB
Mean input power overload
P1I1-2D1: -1 dBm
P1S1-2D2b: -1 dBm
P1L1-2D2: -7 dBm
Minimum input sensitivity
P1I1-2D1: -11 dBm
P1S1-2D2b: -14 dBm
P1L1-2D2: -24 dBm
Maximum output launch power
P1I1-2D1: -1 dBm
P1S1-2D2b: 2 dBm
P1L1-2D2: 4 dBm
Maximum optical path penalty
P1I1-2D1: 1 dB
P1S1-2D2b: 2 dB
P1L1-2D2: 2 dB
Maximum reflectance of receiver
P1I1-2D1: -14 dB
P1S1-2D2b: -27 dB
P1L1-2D2: -27 dB
Attenuation
P1I1-2D1: 0 to 4 dB
P1S1-2D2b: 3 to 11 dB
P1L1-2D2: 11 to 22 dB
FC and FICON SFP specifications
Connector LC
Fiber type
100-M5-SN-I: MMF
200-M5-SN-I: MMF
100-SM-LC-L: SMF
200-SM-LC-L: SMF
100-SM-LL-V: SMF
200-SM-LL-V: SMF
Table 66 FC and FICON optical client interfaces specifications
OTU2 SFP specifications
Table 65 OTU2 optical client interfaces specifications (Cont.)


A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
125
Technical Description (TED) Technical data
Operating wavelength range
100-M5-SN-I: 770-860 nm
200-M5-SN-I: 830-860 nm
100-SM-LC-L: 1300 nm
200-SM-LC-L: 1300 nm
100-SM-LL-V: 1480-1580 nm
200-SM-LL-V: 1480-1580 nm
CWDM C8S1-0D2: 8 CWDM wavelengths
CWDM C8L1-0D2: 8 CWDM wavelengths
CWDM C8S1-1D2: 8 CWDM wavelengths
CWDM C8L1-1D2: 8 CWDM wavelengths
DWDM-SFP: 40 DWDM wavelengths
Enhanced DWDM-SFP: 40 DWDM wavelengths
Required extinction ratio
100-M5-SN-I: 6 dB
200-M5-SN-I: 6 dB
100-SM-LC-L: 6 dB
200-SM-LC-L: 6 dB
100-SM-LL-V: 6 dB
200-SM-LL-V: 6 dB
CWDM C8S1-0D2: 8.2 dB
CWDM C8L1-0D2: 8.2 dB
CWDM C8S1-1D2: 8.2 dB
CWDM C8L1-1D2: 8.2 dB
DWDM: 8.2 dB
Enhanced DWDM: 8.2 dB
Minimum optical return loss
100-M5-SN-I: 12 dB
200-M5-SN-I: 12 dB
100-SM-LC-L: 12 dB
200-SM-LC-L: 12 dB
100-SM-LL-V: 12 dB
200-SM-LL-V: 12 dB
CWDM C8S1-0D2: 24 dB
CWDM C8L1-0D2: 24 dB
CWDM C8S1-1D2: 24 dB
CWDM C8L1-1D2: 24 dB
DWDM: 24 dB
Enhanced DWDM: 24 dB
FC and FICON SFP specifications
Table 66 FC and FICON optical client interfaces specifications (Cont.)


126 A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
Technical Description (TED) Technical data
Mean input power overload
100-M5-SN-I: 0 dBm
200-M5-SN-I: 0 dBm
100-SM-LC-L: -3 dBm
200-SM-LC-L: -3 dBm
100-SM-LL-V: -3 dBm
200-SM-LL-V: -3 dBm
CWDM C8S1-0D2: 0 dBm
CWDM C8L1-0D2: -9 dBm
CWDM C8S1-1D2: 0 dBm
CWDM C8L1-1D2: -9 dBm
DWDM: -10 dBm
Enhanced DWDM: -10 dBm
Minimum input sensitivity
100-M5-SN-I: -15.1 dBm
200-M5-SN-I: -13.1 dBm
100-SM-LC-L: -18.2 dBm
200-SM-LC-L: -18.2 dBm
100-SM-LL-V: -11 dBm
200-SM-LL-V: -18 dBm
CWDM C8S1-0D2: -18 dBm
CWDM C8L1-0D2: -28 dBm
CWDM C8S1-1D2: -18 dBm
CWDM C8L1-1D2: -28 dBm
DWDM: -28 dBm
Enhanced DWDM: -28 dBm
Maximum output launch power
100-M5-SN-I: 0 dBm
200-M5-SN-I: 0 dBm
100-SM-LC-L: -3 dBm
200-SM-LC-L: -3 dBm
100-SM-LL-V: 5 dBm
200-SM-LL-V: 5 dBm
CWDM C8S1-0D2: 5 dBm
CWDM C8L1-0D2: 5 dBm
CWDM C8S1-1D2: 5 dBm
CWDM C8L1-1D2: 5 dBm
DWDM: 4 dBm
Enhanced DWDM: 7 dBm
FC and FICON SFP specifications
Table 66 FC and FICON optical client interfaces specifications (Cont.)


A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
127
Technical Description (TED) Technical data
Maximum optical path penalty
100-M5-SN-I: NA
200-M5-SN-I: NA
100-SM-LC-L: NA
200-SM-LC-L: NA
100-SM-LL-V: 1.5 dB
200-SM-LL-V: 1.5 dB
CWDM C8S1-0D2: 1.5 dB
CWDM C8L1-0D2: 2.5 dB
CWDM C8S1-1D2: 1.5 dB
CWDM C8L1-1D2: 2.5 dB
DWDM: 2 dB
Enhanced DWDM: 2 dB
Maximum reflectance of receiver
100-M5-SN-I: 12 dB
200-M5-SN-I: 12 dB
100-SM-LC-L: 12 dB
200-SM-LC-L: 12 dB
100-SM-LL-V: 12 dB
200-SM-LL-V: 12 dB
CWDM C8S1-0D2: -27 dB
CWDM C8L1-0D2: -27 dB
CWDM C8S1-1D2: -27 dB
CWDM C8L1-1D2: -27 dB
DWDM: -27 dB
Enhanced DWDM: -27 dB
Attenuation
100-M5-SN-I: 3.85 dB
200-M5-SN-I: 2.62 dB
100-SM-LC-L: 4.8 dB
200-SM-LC-L: 7.8 dB
100-SM-LL-V: 18.5 dB
200-SM-LL-V: 18.5 dB
CWDM C8S1-0D2: 16.5 dB
CWDMC8L1-0D2: 25.5 dB
CWDM C8S1-1D2: 16.5 dB
CWDM C8L1-1D2: 25.5 dB
DWDM: 25dB
Enhanced DWDM: 30 dB
FC and FICON SFP specifications
Table 66 FC and FICON optical client interfaces specifications (Cont.)


128 A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
Technical Description (TED) Technical data
9.2.3 Management interfaces
The following tables list important technical data about the management interfaces of
the SURPASS hiT 7300 controller cards.
For controller card data see, chapter 9.3.1.
User channels, ILANs, Q and QF specifications
Connector 8 pin - RJ45
Compliant with IEEE802.3
Codification
10B-T: Manchester coding
100B-T: MLT-3 coding
Communication type Full duplex
Connection type (topology) 10/100BaseT (Star)
Inputs/outputs 2 x Rx/2 x Tx
Line speed 10/100 Mbit/s
Impedance 100 symmetrical lines
Clock No Clock signal, Clock Recovery from data signal
Table 67 User channels, ILANs, Q and QF interfaces specifications
EOW specifications
(handset interface)
Connector RJ22
Realization 4-wire handset
Transmission range 300 to 3400 Hz
Dialing:
method
transmit level
receive level
DTMF
-14 to -9 dBm0
-30 to 0 dBm0
Input/output impedance 600 /600 balanced
Input level 0 dBr
Output level 14 dBr
Table 68 EOW handset interface specifications
EOW specifications
(shelf-interconnector interface)
Connector D-SUB 9 pin
Realization 4-wire interface
Table 69 EOW shelf-interconnect interface specifications


A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
129
Technical Description (TED) Technical data
Transmission range 300 to 3400 Hz
Dialing:
method
transmit level
receive level
DTMF
-14 to -9 dBm0
-30 to 0 dBm0
Input/output impedance 600 /600 balanced
Input level -4/ +16 dBr (set via SW)
Output level -4/ +7 dBr (set via SW)
TIF specifications
Connector D-SUB 25 pin
Number of inputs (sensors)
available per shelf
16
Input voltage range (DC) 0 V to 75 V
Input voltage range for inactive
state
Open or 0 V to 3 V
Input voltage range for active
state
30 V to 75 V
Maximum input current 3 mA
Number of outputs (actors)
available per shelf (user
defined outputs)
8
Output voltage range 75 V
Maximum output current 200 mA
Number of outputs (actors)
available per shelf
(pre-defined outputs)
7
Output voltage range 75 V
Maximum output current 200 mA
Table 70 TIF interface specifications
EOW specifications
(shelf-interconnector interface)
Table 69 EOW shelf-interconnect interface specifications (Cont.)


130 A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
Technical Description (TED) Technical data
TIF distribution panel CTDP-1
Dimensions
For ANSI and ETSI racks:
583 mm wide x 44 mm high x 125 mm deep
(23 inches wide x 1.7 inches high x 5 inches deep)
Connectors
1 x D-SUB 25 pin (for CCEP-1 card of hiT 7300)
5 x D-SUB 9 pin (for OEM system alarm collection)
Number of inputs (sensors)
available
16
Input voltage range (DC) 0 V to 75 V
Input voltage range for inactive
state
Open or 0 V to 3 V
Input voltage range for active
state
30 V to 75 V
Maximum input current 3 mA
Table 71 CTDP-1 specifications


A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
131
Technical Description (TED) Technical data
9.3 Cards and equipments
The following sub-chapters provide information about the SURPASS hiT 7300 cards
and equipments.
9.3.1 Controller cards
The following tables list important technical data about the controller cards used in the
SURPASS hiT 7300 system.
CCEP-1 specifications
Overall dimensions
70 mm wide x 326 mm high x 246 mm deep
(2.76 inch wide x 12.84 inch high x 9.69 inch deep)
Number of occupied slots 2
Weight 1.0 kg
Compact flash capacity 512 MBytes
Type of front panel connectors
1 RJ22
1 D-SUB 9
6 RJ45
2 D-SUB 25
Front panel LEDs
1 OK (green)
1 Fault (red)
4 UBAT 1 to 4 (green)
1 COM-AL/CRIT (red)
1 COM-AL/MAJ (orange)
1 COM-AL/MIN (yellow)
1 EQUIP-AL/CRIT (red)
1 EQUIP-AL/MAJ (orange)
1 EQUIP-AL/MIN (yellow)
1 INFO (green/red)
2 User 1 (green)
2 User 2 (green)
2 ILAN 1 (green)
2 ILAN 2(green)
2 QF (green)
2 Q (green)
1 ACO (blue)
Services and protocols
SNMPv3 via UDP
HTTP via TCP/IP
FTPS via TCP/IP
FTP via TCP/IP
Table 72 CCEP-1 card specifications


132 A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
Technical Description (TED) Technical data
CCMP-1 specifications
Overall dimensions
40 mm wide x 326 mm high x 246 mm deep
(1.57 inch wide x 12.84 inch high x 9.69 inch deep)
Number of occupied slots 1
Weight 0.7 kg
Compact flash capacity 512 MBytes
Type of front panel connectors
1 RJ22
1 D-SUB 9
6 RJ45
Front panel LEDs
1 OK (green)
1 Fault (red)
4 UBAT 1 to 4 (green)
1 COM-AL/CRIT (red)
1 COM-AL/MAJ (orange)
1 COM-AL/MIN (yellow)
1 EQUIP-AL/CRIT (red)
1 EQUIP-AL/MAJ (orange)
1 EQUIP-AL/MIN (yellow)
1 INFO (green/red)
2 User 1 (green)
2 User 2 (green)
2 ILAN 1 (green)
2 ILAN 2(green)
2 QF (green)
2 Q (green)
Services and protocols
SNMPv3 via UDP
HTTP via TCP/IP
FTPS via TCP/IP
FTP via TCP/IP
Table 73 CCMP-1 card specifications
CCSP-1 specifications
Overall dimensions
40 mm wide x 326 mm high x 246 mm deep
(1.57 inch wide x 12.84 inch high x 9.69 inch deep)
Number of occupied slots 1
Weight 0.95 kg
Type of front panel connectors
1 RJ22
1 D-SUB 9
6 RJ45
Table 74 CCSP-1 card specifications


A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
133
Technical Description (TED) Technical data
9.3.2 Line amplifier cards
The following tables list important technical data about the line amplifier cards used in
the SURPASS hiT 7300 system.
Front panel LEDs
1 OK (green)
1 Fault (red)
4 UBAT 1 to 4 (green)
1 COM-AL/CRIT (red)
1 COM-AL/MAJ (orange)
1 COM-AL/MIN (yellow)
1 EQUIP-AL/CRIT (red)
1 EQUIP-AL/MAJ (orange)
1 EQUIP-AL/MIN (yellow)
1 INFO (green/red)
2 User 1 (green)
2 User 2 (green)
2 ILAN 1 (green)
2 ILAN 2(green)
2 QF (green)
2 Q (green)
CCSP-1 specifications
Table 74 CCSP-1 card specifications (Cont.)
LALIC-1, LALBC-1 and LALBCH-1 specifications
Overall dimensions
60 mm wide x 326 mm high x 230 mm deep
(2.36 inch wide x 11.42 inch high x 9.06 inch deep)
Number of occupied slots 2
Weight 1.9 kg
Type of front panel fiber
connectors
1 x optical-electrical hybrid-cable with E2000/HRL
connector (for connection of pump cards)
4 x LC/PC
1 x LC/PC (monitor output)
Front panel LEDs OK (green) and Fault (red)
Maximum output power
with external pump PL-1: 22 dBm
without external pump PL-1: 17 dBm
Laser class Class 1M with APSD
Maximum interstage loss
with 1 x FBG DCM or 1 x 2 slots DCF DCM: 4 dB
with 2 x FBG DCMs or 1 x 3 slots DCF DCM: 8 dB
Minimum external gain
(from input to output connector)
17 dB
Table 75 LALIC-1, LALBC-1 and LALBCH-1 cards specifications


134 A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
Technical Description (TED) Technical data
Maximum external gain
(from input to output connector)
32 dB
Number of internal pump lasers 2
Power of pumps 350 mW (each)
Wavelength of pumps 980 nm (each)
EDFA tilt for optimum noise
figure
0.30 dB/THz
Gain ripple 0.5 dB
LALPC-1 specifications
Overall dimensions
60 mm wide x 326 mm high x 230 mm deep
(2.36 inch wide x 11.42 inch high x 9.06 inch deep)
Number of occupied slots 2
Weight 1.9 kg
Type of front panel fiber
connectors
1 x optical-electrical hybrid-cable with E2000/HRL
connector (for connection of pump cards)
4 x LC/PC
1 x LC/PC (monitor output)
Front panel LEDs OK (green) and Fault (red)
Maximum output power
with external pump PL-1: 22.7 dBm
without external pump PL-1: 17.4 dBm
Laser class Class 1M with APSD
Maximum interstage loss
with 1 x FBG DCM or 1 x 2 slots DCF DCM: 4 dB
with 2 x FBG DCMs or 1 x 3 slots DCF DCM: 8 dB
Minimum external gain
(from input to output connector)
17 dB
Maximum external gain
(from input to output connector)
32 dB
Number of internal pump lasers 2
Power of pumps 350 mW (each)
Wavelength of pumps 980 nm (each)
EDFA tilt for optimum noise
figure
0.30 dB/THz
Gain ripple 0.5 dB
Table 76 LALPC-1 card specifications
LALIC-1, LALBC-1 and LALBCH-1 specifications
Table 75 LALIC-1, LALBC-1 and LALBCH-1 cards specifications (Cont.)


A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
135
Technical Description (TED) Technical data
LAMIC-1 specifications
Overall dimensions
30 mm wide x 326 mm high x 230 mm deep
(1.18 inch wide x 11.42 inch high x 9.06 inch deep)
Number of occupied slots 1
Weight 1.3 kg
Type of front panel fiber
connectors
4 x LC/PC
1 x LC/PC (monitor output)
Front panel LEDs OK (green) and Fault (red)
Maximum output power 17 dBm
Laser class Class 1M with APSD
Maximum interstage loss
with 1 x FBG DCM or 1 x 2 slots DCF DCM: 4 dB
with 2 x FBG DCMs or 1 x 3 slots DCF DCM: 6 dB
Minimum external gain
(from input to output connector)
12 dB
Maximum external gain
(from input to output connector)
31 dB
Number of internal pump lasers 1
Power of pumps 350 mW
Wavelength of pumps 980 nm
EDFA tilt for optimum noise
figure
0 dB/THz
Gain ripple 0.5 dB
Table 77 LAMIC-1 card specifications
LAMPC-1 specifications
Overall dimensions
30 mm wide x 326 mm high x 230 mm deep
(1.18 inch wide x 11.42 inch high x 9.06 inch deep)
Number of occupied slots 1
Weight 1.3 kg
Type of front panel fiber
connectors
4 x LC/PC
1 x LC/PC (monitor output)
Front panel LEDs OK (green) and Fault (red)
Maximum output power 17.7 dBm
Laser class Class 1M with APSD
Table 78 LAMPC-1 card specifications


136 A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
Technical Description (TED) Technical data
Maximum interstage loss
with 1 x FBG DCM or 1 x 2 slots DCF DCM: 4 dB
with 2 x FBG DCMs or 1 x 3 slots DCF DCM: 6 dB
Minimum external gain
(from input to output connector)
12 dB
Maximum external gain
(from input to output connector)
31 dB
Number of internal pump lasers 1
Power of pumps 350 mW
Wavelength of pumps 980 nm
EDFA tilt for optimum noise
figure
0 dB/THz
Gain ripple 0.5 dB
LASBC-1 specifications
Overall dimensions
30 mm wide x 326 mm high x 230 mm deep
(1.18 inch wide x 11.42 inch high x 9.06 inch deep)
Number of occupied slots 1
Weight 1.3 kg
Type of front panel fiber
connectors
2 x LC/PC
1 x LC/PC (monitor output)
Front panel LEDs OK (green) and Fault (red)
Maximum output power 17 dBm
Laser class Class 1M with APSD
Minimum external gain
(from input to output connector)
10 dB
Maximum external gain
(from input to output connector)
20 dB
Number of internal pump lasers 1
Power of pumps 250 mW
Wavelength of pumps 980 nm
EDFA tilt for optimum noise
figure
0 dB/THz
Gain ripple 0.5 dB
Table 79 LASBC-1 card specifications
LAMPC-1 specifications
Table 78 LAMPC-1 card specifications (Cont.)


A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
137
Technical Description (TED) Technical data
9.3.3 Raman Pump card
The following table lists important technical data about the Raman pump card used in
the SURPASS hiT 7300 system.
9.3.4 External pump card
The following table lists important technical data about the external pump card used in
the SURPASS hiT 7300 system.
PRC-1 specifications
Overall dimensions
60 mm wide x 326 mm high x 246 mm deep
(2.36 inch wide x 12.84 inch high x 9.69 inch deep)
Number of occupied slots 2
Weight 2.9 kg
Type of front panel fiber
connectors
4 x LC/PC
Front panel LEDs OK (green) and Fault (red)
Pump maximum output power
25.5 dBm per wavelength (28.5 dBm total both
wavelengths)
Laser class Class 1M with APSD
Typical insertion loss
for monitor paths
ILMonLINE = 22 dB
IL
MonOSC
= 15 dB
IL
MonPUMP
= 22 dB
Minimum Raman gain 10.5 dB
Maximum Raman gain
(from input to output connector)
17.5 dB
Number of internal pump lasers 4
Power of pumps 250 mW (per pump)
Wavelength of pumps
Wavelength1 = 1425 nm
Wavelength2 = 1452 nm
Table 80 PRC-1 card specifications
PL-1 specifications
Overall dimensions
30 mm wide x 326 mm high x 246 mm deep
(1.18 inch wide x 12.84 inch high x 9.69 inch deep)
Number of occupied slots 1
Weight 1.0 kg
Type of front panel fiber
connectors
1 x electrical hybrid-cable with an angled E2000
(behind faceplate for safety purposes)
Table 81 PL-1 card specifications


138 A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
Technical Description (TED) Technical data
9.3.5 Channel power monitor card
The following table lists important technical data about the channel power monitor card
used in the SURPASS hiT 7300 system.
9.3.6 Booster-less line interface card
The following tables list important technical data about the booster-less line interface
card used in the SURPASS hiT 7300 system.
Front panel LEDs OK (green) and Fault (red)
Laser class Class 1M with APSD
Number of pump lasers 1
Power of pump 300 mW
Wavelength of pump 1480 nm
PL-1 specifications
Table 81 PL-1 card specifications (Cont.)
MCP404-1 and MCP404-2 specifications
Overall dimensions
30 mm wide x 326 mm high x 246 mm deep
(1.18 inch wide x 12.84 inch high x 9.69 inch deep)
Number of occupied slots 1
Weight 1.0 kg
Type of front panel fiber
connectors
8 x LC/PC
Front panel LEDs OK (green) and Fault (red)
Supported bit rates
MCP404-1: 2.5 Gbit/s, 10 Gbit/s and 40 Gbit/s
MCP404-2: 2.5 Gbit/s and 10 Gbit/s
Minimum input power -28.5 dBm (per channel)
Maximum input power -8.5 dBm (per channel)
Maximum Insertion Loss
5.2 dB
(coupler loss between input and output monitor ports)
Table 82 MCP404-1 and MCP404-2 card specifications
LIFB-1 specifications
Overall dimensions
30 mm wide x 326 mm high x 246 mm deep
(1.18 inch wide x 12.84 inch high x 9.69 inch deep)
Number of occupied slots 1
Weight 0.9 kg
Table 83 LIFB-1 card specifications


A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
139
Technical Description (TED) Technical data
9.3.7 Filter cards
The following tables list important technical data about the filter cards used in the
SURPASS hiT 7300 system.
Type of front panel fiber
connectors
2 x LC/PC
1 x LC/PC (monitor output)
Front panel LEDs OK (green) and Fault (red)
Laser class Class 1M
Maximum input power 15 dBm
Maximum output power 15 dBm
OSC signal data rate 12.5 Mbit/s (NRZ)
OSC signal maximum
output power
-6 dBm
LIFB-1 specifications
Table 83 LIFB-1 card specifications (Cont.)
F04MDU-1 specifications
Overall dimensions
30 mm wide x 326 mm high x 246 mm deep
(1.18 inch wide x 12.84 inch high x 9.69 inch deep)
Number of Number of occupied
slots
1
Weight 0.9 kg
Type of front panel fiber
connectors
12 x LC/PC duplex
Operating wavelength range 1529.55 to 1560.60 nm
Maximum input power per port 21 dBm
Table 84 F04MDU-1 card specifications


140 A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
Technical Description (TED) Technical data
Insertion loss
F1-IN-1C-OUT: 1.9 dB
F2-IN-1C-OUT: 2.2 dB
F3-IN-1C-OUT: 1.9 dB
F4-IN-1C-OUT: 1.8 dB
Cx-MX-IN-1C-OUT: 0.6 dB
C01-MX-IN-1C-OUT: 1.1 dB
C02-MX-IN-1C-OUT: 1.1 dB
2C-IN-DX-OUT: 0.6 dB
2C-IN-F1-OUT: 2.1 dB
2C-IN-F2-OUT: 1.6 dB
2C-IN-F3-OUT: 2.2 dB
2C-IN-F4-OUT: 2.7 dB
F04MDN-1 specifications
Overall dimensions
30 mm wide x 326 mm high x 246 mm deep
(1.18 inch wide x 12.84 inch high x 9.69 inch deep)
Number of occupied slots 1
Weight 0.9 kg
Type of front panel fiber
connectors
10 x LC/PC
Operating wavelength range 1529.55 to 1560.60 nm
Maximum input power per port 21 dBm
Insertion loss
F1-IN-1C-OUT: 1.2 dB
F2-IN-1C-OUT: 1.7 dB
F3-IN-1C-OUT: 1.4 dB
F4-IN-1C-OUT: 1.1 dB
2C-IN-F1-OUT: 1.4 dB
2C-IN-F2-OUT: 1.1 dB
2C-IN-F3-OUT: 1.7 dB
2C-IN-F4-OUT: 2.0 dB
Table 85 F04MDN-1 card specifications
F04MDU-1 specifications
Table 84 F04MDU-1 card specifications (Cont.)


A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
141
Technical Description (TED) Technical data
F08SB-1 specifications
Overall dimensions
30 mm wide x 326 mm high x 246 mm deep
(1.18 inch wide x 12.84 inch high x 9.69 inch deep)
Number of occupied slots 1
Weight 0.9 kg
Type of front panel fiber
connectors
10 x LC/PC
Operating wavelength range 1529.55 to 1560.60 nm
Maximum input power per port 24.5 dBm
Insertion loss
C05-IN14-1C-OUT: 1.8 dB
C05-IN23-1C-OUT: 1.6 dB
C06-IN14-1C-OUT: 0.8 dB
C06-IN23-1C-OUT: 0.6 dB
2C-IN-C0514-OUT: 0.8 dB
2C-IN-C0523-OUT: 0.6 dB
2C-IN-C0614-OUT: 1.8 dB
2C-IN-C0623-OUT: 1.6 dB
R-IN-1C-OUT: 1.2 dB
B-IN-1C-OUT: 1.6 dB
2C-IN-R-OUT: 1.6 dB
2C-IN-B-OUT: 1.2 dB
Table 86 F08SB-1 card specifications
F16SB-1 specifications
Overall dimensions
30 mm wide x 326 mm high x 246 mm deep
(1.18 inch wide x 12.84 inch high x 9.69 inch deep)
Number of occupied slots 1
Weight 0.9 kg
Type of front panel fiber
connectors
10 x LC/PC
Operating wavelength range
blue band: 1529.55 to 1541.35 nm
red band: 1548.51 to 1560.60 nm
Maximum input power per port 24.5 dBm
Table 87 F16SB-1 card specifications


142 A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
Technical Description (TED) Technical data
Insertion loss
A-IN-14-1C-OUT: -1.5 dB
A-IN-23-1C-OUT: -1.5 dB
B-IN-14-1C-OUT: -1.7 dB
B-IN-23-1C-OUT: -1.5 dB
C-IN-14-1C-OUT: -1.3 dB
C-IN-23-1C-OUT: -1.1 dB
D-IN-14-1C-OUT: -0.8 dB
D-IN-23-1C-OUT: -0.6 dB
2C-IN-A-OUT-14: -1.2 dB
2C-IN-A-OUT-23: -0.6 dB
2C-IN-B-OUT-14: -1.2 dB
2C-IN-B-OUT-23: -1.0 dB
2C-IN-C-OUT-14: -1.6 dB
2C-IN-C-OUT-23: -1.4 dB
2C-IN-D-OUT-14: -2.0 dB
2C-IN-D-OUT-23: -1.8 dB
F40-1 specifications
Overall dimensions
60 mm wide x 326 mm high x 246 mm deep
(2.36 inch wide x 12.84 inch high x 9.69 inch deep)
Number of occupied slots 2
Weight 1.5 kg
Type of front panel fiber
connectors
41 x LC/PC
Front panel LEDs MUX (green), DEMUX (green) and Fault (red)
Operating wavelength range 1529.55 to 1563.86 nm
Maximum input power per port 24.5 dBm
Insertion loss COM-F[192.1 ; 196.0]: 4.7 dB
Table 88 F40-1 card specifications
F40MR-1 specifications
Overall dimensions
90 mm wide x 326 mm high x 246 mm deep
(3.54 inch wide x 12.84 inch high x 9.69 inch deep)
Table 89 F40MR-1 card specifications
F16SB-1 specifications
Table 87 F16SB-1 card specifications (Cont.)


A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
143
Technical Description (TED) Technical data
For a more detailed information about the filter ports, please refer to the Interconnect,
Configuration and Mechanical Assembly (ICMA) of SURPASS hiT 7300.
9.3.8 CWDM equipment
The following tables list important technical data about the CWDM patch-cords and filter
pack used in the SURPASS hiT 7300 system.
Number of occupied slots 3
Weight 3.6 kg
Type of front panel fiber
connectors
45 x LC/PC
Operating wavelength range 1529.55 to 1563.86 nm
Maximum input power per port
RX-IN: 24.5 dBm
EXP-IN: 21 dBm
Insertion loss
2C-IN-OUT1: -4.3 dB
2C-IN-OUT2: -2.7 dB
EXP-IN-1C-OUT2: -5.9 dB
F[192.1 ; 196.0]-IN-1C-OUT2: -4.4 dB
F40MR-1 specifications
Table 89 F40MR-1 card specifications (Cont.)
CWDM equipment specifications
CWDM filter pack
dimensions
For ANSI and ETSI racks:
450 mm wide x 44.5 mm high x 280 mm deep
(17.1 inches wide x 1.8 inches high x 11 inches deep)
CWDM filter modules
dimensions
FC01MDUP-1/n:
220 mm wide x x 20 mm high x 215 mm deep
(8.7 inches wide x 0.8 inches high x 8.5 inches deep)
FC04MDUP-1/E and FC04MDP-1/C:
220 mm wide x x 40 mm high x 215 mm deep
(8.7 inches wide x 1.6 inches high x 8.5 inches deep)
CWDM SFP power budget 26 dB
Fiber loss
0.5 dB/km (for wide-spread CWDM wavelengths over
G.652 fiber)
Insertion loss
for express traffic
FC01U-1/n: 0.4 dB
FC01MDUP-1/n: 0.4 dB
FC04MDUP-1/E: 1.4 dB
FC04MDP-1/C: 1.4 dB
Table 90 CWDM equipment specifications


144 A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
Technical Description (TED) Technical data
9.3.9 Variable Optical Attenuator cards
The following table lists important technical data about the VOA card used in the
SURPASS hiT 7300 system.
9.3.10 Dispersion Compensation Module cards
The following tables list important technical data about the DCM cards used in the
SURPASS hiT 7300 system.
Insertion loss
for add/drop traffic
FC01U-1/n: 0.6 dB
FC01MDUP-1/n: 0.6 dB
FC04MDUP-1/E
for 1611nm: 0.6dB
for 1591 nm: 0.9 dB
for 1471 nm: 1.2 dB
for 1491 nm: 1.5 dB
FC04MDP-1/C: 1.4 dB
for 1511 nm: 0.6 dB
for 1531 nm: 0.9 dB
for 1571 nm: 1.2 dB
for 1551 nm: 1.5 dB
CWDM equipment specifications
Table 90 CWDM equipment specifications (Cont.)
O08VA-1 specifications
Overall dimensions
30 mm wide x 326 mm high x 246 mm deep
(1.18 inch wide x 12.84 inch high x 9.69 inch deep)
Number of occupied slots 1
Weight 1.0 kg
Type of front panel fiber
connectors
16 x LC/PC
Front panel LEDs OK (green) and Fault (red)
Attenuation range 0 to 22 dB
Operating band 1528 to 1610 nm
Insertion loss 1.3 dB (per channel)
Resolution 0.1 dB per step
Maximum input power 21 dBm
Table 91 O08VA-1 card specifications


A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
145
Technical Description (TED) Technical data
D0340SMF, D0680SMF, D1020SMF, D1360SMF, D1700SMF,
D0340LEF, D0510LEF and D0680LEF specifications
Overall dimensions
30 mm wide x 326 mm high x 246 mm deep
(1.18 inch wide x 12.84 inch high x 9.69 inch deep)
Number of occupied slots 1
Weight typ.: 0.5 kg; max.: 1.5 kg
Type of front panel fiber
connectors
2 x LC/PC
Insertion loss typ.: 2.4 dB ; max.: 4 dB
Table 92 D0340SMF, D0680SMF, D1020SMF, D1360SMF, D1700SMF,
D0340LEF, D0510LEF and D0680LEF cards specifications
D0170DCF, D0340DCF, D0510DCF and D0680DCF specifications
Overall dimensions
60 mm wide x 326 mm high x 246 mm deep
(2.36 inch wide x 12.84 inch high x 9.69 inch deep)
Number of occupied slots 2
Weight 1.8 kg
Type of front panel fiber
connectors
2 x LC/PC
Insertion loss
for 10 km (DK10):
typ.: 1.3 dB; max.: 2.0 dB
for 20 km (DK20):
typ.: 1.5 dB; max.: 2.4 dB
for 30 km (DK30):
typ.: 2.2 dB; max.: 2.8 dB
for 40 km (DK40):
typ.: 2.8 dB; max.: 3.6 dB
Relative Dispersion Slope
(@1550nm)
-0.0035 nm
-1
Maximum return loss -27 dB
Table 93 D0340DCF, D0510DCF and D0680DCF cards specifications
D1020DCF and D1360DCF specifications
Overall dimensions
90 mm wide x 326 mm high x 246 mm deep
(3.54 inch wide x 12.84 inch high x 9.69 inch deep)
Number of occupied slots 3
Table 94 D1020DCF and D1360DCF cards specifications


146 A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
Technical Description (TED) Technical data
9.3.11 UDCM cards and tray
The following tables list important technical data about the UDCM cards and tray used
in the SURPASS hiT 7300 system.
Weight 3.0 kg
Type of front panel fiber
connectors
2 x LC/PC
Insertion loss
for 60 km (DK60):
typ.: 3.7 dB; max.: 4.2 dB
for 80 km (DK80):
typ.: 4.7 dB; max.: 5.2 dB
Relative Dispersion Slope
(@1550nm)
-0.0035 nm
-1
Maximum return loss -27 dB
D1020DCF and D1360DCF specifications
Table 94 D1020DCF and D1360DCF cards specifications (Cont.)
UDCMs specifications
Shelf size (UDCM tray)
For ANSI and ETSI racks:
583 mm wide x 88.2 mm high x 300.3 mm deep
(23 inches wide x 3.5 inches high x 11.8 inches deep)
UDCM dimensions
(up to 4 into a UDCM tray)
268 mm wide x 40.8 mm or 83.2 mm high x 294 mm deep
(10.5 inches wide x 1.6 inches or 3.3 inches high x 11.6
inches deep)
Weight
UDCM cards (depending on type):
10 km to 80 km: 3.2 kg + n x 0.1 kg
(n for each 10 km = 1 to 8);
90 km to 120 km: 3.7 kg + n x 0.1 kg
(n for each 10 km = 9 to 12);
UDCM tray: 5.0 kg
Table 95 UDCM cards and tray specifications


A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
147
Technical Description (TED) Technical data
Insertion loss
UDCMC5LL
typ.: 1.0 dB ; max.: 1.6 dB
UDCMC10LL
typ.: 1.2 dB ; max.: 1.8 dB
UDCMC15LL
typ.: 1.4 dB ; max.: 1.9 dB
UDCMC20LL
typ.: 1.6 dB ; max.: 2.0 dB
UDCMC25LL
typ.: 1.9 dB ; max.: 2.5 dB
UDCMC30LL
typ.: 2.5 dB ; max.: 2.8 dB
UDCMC60LL
typ.: 4.5 dB ; max.: 5.0 dB
UDCMC80LL
typ.: 5.6 dB ; max.: 6.0 dB
UDCMC100LL
typ.: 6.5 dB ; max.: 7.0 dB
UDCMC120LL
typ.: 7.6 dB ; max.: 8.0 dB
UDCM340H
typ.: 4.3 dB ; max.: 6.0 dB
UDCM510H
typ.: 5.6 dB ; max.: 7.9 dB
UDCMC48P
typ.: 1.2 dB ; max.: 1.8 dB
UDCMC80P
typ.: 1.5 dB ; max.: 2.2 dB
UDCMC128P
typ.: 2.1 dB ; max.: 2.8 dB
UDCMC177P
typ.: 2.7 dB ; max.: 3.5 dB
UDCMC240P
typ.: 3.4 dB ; max.: 4.3 dB
UDCMC384P
typ.: 5.1 dB ; max.: 6.2 dB
UDCMC480P
typ.: 6.2 dB ; max.: 7.5 dB
UDCMC576P
typ.: 7.4 dB ; max.: 8.8 dB
UDCMs specifications
Table 95 UDCM cards and tray specifications (Cont.)


148 A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
Technical Description (TED) Technical data
Mean PMD
3
UDCMC5LL
typ.: 0.15 ps ; max.: 0.25 ps
UDCMC10LL
typ.: 0.20 ps ; max.: 0.30 ps
UDCMC15LL
typ.: 0.25 ps ; max.: 0.35 ps
UDCMC20LL
typ.: 0.25 ps ; max.: 0.40 ps
UDCMC25LL
typ.: 0.35 ps ; max.: 0.45 ps
UDCMC30LL
typ.: 0.30 ps ; max.: 0.45 ps
UDCMC60LL
typ.: 0.30 ps ; max.: 0.60 ps
UDCMC80LL
typ.: 0.30 ps ; max.: 0.70 ps
UDCMC100LL
typ.: 0.40 ps ; max.: 0.85 ps
UDCMC120LL
typ.: 0.45 ps ; max.: 0.90 ps
UDCM340H
typ.: 0.50 ps ; max.: 0.70 ps
UDCM510H
typ.: 0.70 ps ; max.: 0.90 ps
UDCMC48P
typ.: 0.20 ps ; max.: 0.60 ps
UDCMC80P
typ.: 0.25 ps ; max.: 0.70 ps
UDCMC128P
typ.: 0.30 ps ; max.: 0.80 ps
UDCMC177P
typ.: 0.35 ps ; max.: 0.90 ps
UDCMC240P
typ.: 0.40 ps ; max.: 0.95 ps
UDCMC384P
typ.: 0.50 ps ; max.: 1.10 ps
UDCMC480P
typ.: 0.55 ps ; max.: 1.23 ps
UDCMC576P
typ.: 0.60 ps ; max.: 1.35 ps
UDCMs specifications
Table 95 UDCM cards and tray specifications (Cont.)


A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
149
Technical Description (TED) Technical data
9.3.12 Transponder cards
The following tables list important technical data about the transponder cards used in
the SURPASS hiT 7300 system.
Maximum return loss
without LC connector
(Rayleigh backscatter)
27 dB
UDCMs specifications
Table 95 UDCM cards and tray specifications (Cont.)
I04T2G5-1 specifications
Overall dimensions
30 mm wide x 326 mm high x 246 mm deep
(1.18 inch wide x 12.84 inch high x 9.69 inch
deep)
Number of occupied slots 1
Weight (with 6 SFPs) 1.1 kg
Type of front panel fiber
connectors
Client side: 8 x LC/PC
Line side: 4 x LC/PC
Front panel LEDs OK (green) and Fault (red)
Interface 0.1 km 1000BASE-T
Interface 0.3 km 200-M5-SN-I
Interface 0.5 km
1000BASE-SX
100-M5-SN-I
Interface 2 km
I-16
SR
P1I1-1D1
Interface 10 km
1000BASE-LX
100-SM-LC-L
200-SM-LC-L
Interface 15 km
S-16.1
IR-1
P1S1-1D1
Interface 40 km
L-16.1
LR-1
P1L1-1D1
C8S1-0D2
C8S1-1D2
Interface 50 km
100-SM-LL-V
200-SM-LL-V
Table 96 I04T2G5-1 card specifications


150 A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
Technical Description (TED) Technical data
Interface 80 km
1000BASE-ZX
L-16.2
LR-2
P1L1-1D2
C8L1-0D2
C8L1-1D2
DWDM-SFP
Interface 120 km Enhanced DWDM-SFP
Data bit rates (client)
FC/FICON 1G: 1.06 Gbit/s
GbE: 1.25 Gbit/s
FC/FICON 2G: 2.13 Gbit/s
STM-16/OC-48: 2.49 Gbit/s
OTU1: 2.67 Gbit/s
Data bit rates (line) 2.67 Gbit/s (=255/238*2.48832 Gbit/s)
Operating wavelength range
(depends on the type of client
interface)
GbE (see Table 59)
STM-16/OC-48 (see Table 62)
OTU1 (see Table 64)
FC/FICON (see Table 66)
Client out maximum launch power
(depends on the type of client
interface)
GbE (see Table 59)
STM-16/OC-48 (see Table 62)
OTU1 (see Table 64)
FC/FICON (see Table 66)
Attenuation
(depends on the type of client
interface)
GbE (see Table 59)
STM-16/OC-48 (see Table 62)
OTU1 (see Table 64)
FC/FICON (see Table 66)
Jitter performance according to ITU-T G.8251
Extinction ratio > 8.2 dB at rated output power
I01T10G-1 Regio/LH specifications
Overall dimensions
30 mm wide x 326 mm high x 246 mm deep
(1.18 inch wide x 12.84 inch high x 9.69 inch
deep)
Number of occupied slots 1
Weight (with 8 SFPs) 1.2 kg
Table 97 I01T10G-1 Regio/LH card specifications
I04T2G5-1 specifications
Table 96 I04T2G5-1 card specifications (Cont.)


A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
151
Technical Description (TED) Technical data
Type of front panel fiber
connectors
Client side: 2 x LC/PC
Line side: 2 x LC/PC
Front panel LEDs OK (green) and Fault (red)
Interface 0.3 km
10GbE-SR
10GbE-SW
Interface 2 km
10GbE-LR
10GbE-LW
I-64.1
SR-1
P1I1-2D1
Interface 40 km
10GbE-ER
10GbE-EW
S-64.2b
IR-2b
P1S1-2D2b
Interface 80 km
10GbE-ZR
10GbE-ZW
P1L1-2D2
Data bit rates (client)
10GbE WAN: 9.95 Gbit/s
STM-64/OC-192: 9.95 Gbit/s
10GbE LAN: 10.31 Gbit/s
OTU2: 10.71 Gbit/s
Data bit rates (line) 11.00 Gbit/s or 11.35 Gbit/s
Operating wavelength range
(depends on the type of client
interface)
10GbE (see Table 61)
STM-64/OC-192 (see Table 63)
OTU2 (see Table 65)
Client out maximum launch power
(depends on the type of client
interface)
10GbE (see Table 61)
STM-64/OC-192 (see Table 63)
OTU2 (see Table 65)
Attenuation
(depends on the type of client
interface)
10GbE (see Table 61)
STM-64/OC-192 (see Table 63)
OTU2 (see Table 65)
Jitter performance according to ITU-T G.8251
Extinction ratio
LH: >12 dB at rated output power (without filter)
Regio: >8.2 dB at rated output power
I01T10G-1 Regio/LH specifications
Table 97 I01T10G-1 Regio/LH card specifications (Cont.)


152 A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
Technical Description (TED) Technical data
I08T10G-1 specifications
Overall dimensions
60 mm wide x 326 mm high x 246 mm deep
(2.36 inch wide x 12.84 inch high x 9.69 inch
deep)
Number of occupied slots 2
Weight (with 6 SFPs) 1.8 kg
Type of front panel fiber
connectors
Client side: 16 x LC/PC
Line side: 2 x LC/PC
Front panel LEDs OK (green) and Fault (red)
Interface 0.1 km 1000BASE-T
Interface 0.5 km 1000BASE-SX
Interface 2 km
I-16
SR
P1I1-1D1
Interface 10 km 1000BASE-LX
Interface 15 km
S-16.1
IR-1
P1S1-1D1
Interface 40 km
L-16.1
LR-1
P1L1-1D1
C8S1-0D2
C8S1-1D2
Interface 80 km
1000BASE-ZX
L-16.2
LR-2
P1L1-1D2
C8L1-0D2
C8L1-1D2
DWDM-SFP
Interface 120 km Enhanced DWDM-SFP
Data bit rates (client)
GbE: 1.25 Gbit/s
STM-16/OC-48: 2.49 Gbit/s
OTU1: 2.67 Gbit/s
Data bit rates (line) 11.00 Gbit/s
Operating wavelength range
(depends on the type of client
interface)
GbE (see Table 59)
STM-16/OC-48 (see Table 62)
OTU1 (see Table 64)
Table 98 I08T10G-1 card specifications


A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
153
Technical Description (TED) Technical data
9.3.13 Optical channel protection card
The following table lists important technical data about the OChP card used in the
SURPASS hiT 7300 system.
9.4 Supervision and control
The following table lists important technical data about the DCN used in the SURPASS
hiT 7300 system.
Client out maximum launch power
(depends on the type of client
interface)
GbE (see Table 59)
STM-16/OC-48 (see Table 62)
OTU1 (see Table 64)
Attenuation
(depends on the type of client
interface)
GbE (see Table 59)
STM-16/OC-48 (see Table 62)
OTU1 (see Table 64)
Jitter performance according to ITU-T G.8251
Extinction ratio
LH: > 12 dB at rated output power (without filter)
Regio: > 8.2 dB at rated output power
I08T10G-1 specifications
Table 98 I08T10G-1 card specifications (Cont.)
O03CP-1 specifications
Overall dimensions
30 mm wide x 326 mm high x 246 mm deep
(1.18 inch wide x 12.84 inch high x 9.69 inch deep)
Number of occupied slots 1
Weight 0.9 kg
Type of front panel fiber
connectors
18 x LC/PC
Number of combiners 3
Number of splitters 3
Maximum Insertion Loss 3.7 dB (per channel)
Table 99 O03CP-1 card specifications
OSC specifications
Bandwidth 10 Mbit/s
Data bit rate 12.5 Mbit/s
Data format NRZ
Table 100 OSC specifications


154 A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
Technical Description (TED) Technical data
9.5 Power supply and system consumptions
The following sub-chapters provide information about the SURPASS hiT 7300 power
supply and system consumptions.
9.5.1 Rack and shelf power supply
The following table lists important technical data about the rack and shelf power supply
of the SURPASS hiT 7300 system.
Transmitter output power range
+5 dBm to +8 dBm (only in LALBCH-1)
+1.5 dBm to +5 dBm
(remaining line amplifier cards)
Minimum extinction ratio >10 dB
Maximum overload
Maximum input power without permanent
destruction of the optical receiver is:
+5 dBm
DCN specifications
Maximum number of NEs
per DCN
118
Supported protocols and
functions
ARP
802.1q: VLAN tagging
STP
LLDP
ICPM
NTP
DHCP
NAPT
DNS
XML/RPC
Embedded services
SNMPv3 for network management
HTTP for NE access via browser
FTP for software download and distribution
XML-RPC for pre-emphasis and file distribution control
User channel: point-to-point Ethernet channel
NTP for time synchronization
DNS for NE name/IP assignment
Table 101 DCN specifications
OSC specifications
Table 100 OSC specifications (Cont.)
Battery supply voltage 48/60 V
Table 102 Rack and shelf power supply specifications


A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
155
Technical Description (TED) Technical data
9.5.2 Shelves power consumption
The following table lists important technical data about the electrical power consumption
of the SURPASS hiT 7300 shelves.
9.5.3 Cards and units power consumption
The following table lists important technical data about the electrical power consumption
of the SURPASS hiT 7300 cards and units.
DC supply voltage range (ANSI) 40.5 V to 57.5 V
DC supply voltage range (ETSI) 40.5 V to 75 V
Number of working circuit breakers/fuses per shelf 2 of 20 A (mounted at PDP)
Number of protection circuit breakers/fuses per shelf 2 of 20 A (mounted at PDP)
Table 102 Rack and shelf power supply specifications (Cont.)
Maximum power consumption of the shelves
(fully equipped)
1200 W
Table 103 Electrical power consumption of the shelves
Card/unit
Electrical power consumption (W)
typical maximum
Fan and Filter unit 80.00 96.00
CCEP-1 25.00 40.00
CCMP-1 25.00 40.00
CCSP-1 16.00 22.00
LALBC-1 22.00 40.00
LALBCH-1 22.00 40.00
LALIC-1 22.00 40.00
LALPC-1 22.00 40.00
LAMIC-1 16.00 28.00
LAMPC-1 16.00 28.00
LASBC-1 16.00 28.00
PRC-1 40.00 114.00
PL-1 15.00 25.00
MCP404-1 7.50 12.00
MCP404-2 7.50 12.00
LIFB-1 5.00 8.00
Table 104 Electrical power consumption of the cards and units


156 A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
Technical Description (TED) Technical data
9.6 Environmental specifications
The following table lists important technical data about the environmental specifications
of the SURPASS hiT 7300 system.
F04MDU-1 0.02 0.04
F04MDN-1 0.02 0.04
F08SB-1 0.02 0.04
F16SB-1 1.65 1.73
F40-1 8.45 13.20
F40MR-1 53.00 68.50
O08VA-1 5.00 6.00
D0340SMF 0.02 0.04
D0680SMF 0.02 0.04
D1020SMF 0.02 0.04
D1360SMF 0.02 0.04
D1700SMF 0.02 0.04
D0340LEF 0.02 0.04
D0510LEF 0.02 0.04
D0680LEF 0.02 0.04
D0170DCF 0.02 0.04
D0340DCF 0.02 0.04
D0510DCF 0.02 0.04
D0680DCF 0.02 0.04
D1020DCF 0.02 0.04
D1360DCF 0.02 0.04
I04T2G5-1 26.00 31.00
I01T10G-1 Regio 30.00 40.00
I01T10G-1 LH 35.00 45.00
I01T10G-1 LHD 40.00 50.00
I08T10G-1 Regio 61.00 76.00
I08T10G-1 LH 65.00 81.00
I08T10G-1 LHD 69.00 86.00
O03CP-1 0.02 0.03
Card/unit
Electrical power consumption (W)
typical maximum
Table 104 Electrical power consumption of the cards and units (Cont.)


A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
157
Technical Description (TED) Technical data
9.7 Shelves mechanical data
The following table lists important technical data about the mechanical data of the
SURPASS hiT 7300 shelves.
Operating range according to
ETSI standard 300 019 class 3.1E
-5to +40C for steady conditions
-5to +45C for exceptional conditions
(temperature of air flowing into the shelves)
Operating range according to
Telcordia GR 63
+5 to +40C ; short term: -5 to +55C
Storage range according to
ETSI standard 300 019 class 1.2
-25to +55C
Storage range according to
Telcordia GR 63
-40to +70C during a maximum of 72 hours
Climate during transport according to
ETSI standard 300 019 class 2.3
-40to +70C ; 95% humidity at +45C
Humidity 5% to 95%
Altitude -60 m to 4000 m
Earthquake shock/vibration Zone 4 (ANSI rack only)
Table 105 System environmental specifications
Parameter
Type of shelf
ANSI ETSI
Overall height (inches/mm) 20.4 517.5
Overall depth (inches/mm) 11 280
Overall width with flanges (inches/mm) 23 533
Overall width without flanges (inches/mm) 19.7 500
Mounting center distance (inches/mm) 22.3 515
Mounting depth - front (inches/mm) 4.9 125
1)
Mounting depth - rear (inches/mm) 6.1 155
2)
Rack space consumed per shelf (inches/mm)
21 inches
(12U)
550 mm
(22 SU)
Weight of an unequipped shelf (lb/kg) 33.1 15
Weight of an equipped shelf (lb/kg) 99.2 45
1) 40 mm when mounted in a standard ETSI rack.
2) 240 mm when mounted in a standard ETSI rack.
Table 106 Dimensions and weight of the shelves


158 A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
Technical Description (TED) Technical data
9.8 Racks mechanical data
The following tables list important technical data about the mechanical data of the
SURPASS hiT 7300 racks.
9.9 PC requirements for the LCT software
For running the LCT software, the PC to be used should fulfill the minimum requirements
specified in the following table.
Parameter Dimensions
Height (feet)
7
7 1/2
1)
8
1)
Usable height (HU)
44
2)
(in a 7 ft rack)
46 (in a 7 1/2 ft rack)
49 (in a 8 ft rack)
Width (inches) 26
Usable width between
rack uprights (inches)
21.5
Depth (inches) 12
Weight of an unequipped rack (lb)
(with rear side front covers)
139
Weight of an equipped rack (lb)
(fully equipped)
441
1) In some customer applications, 7 1/2 ft and 8 ft racks are used
2) 1 HU = 1 3/4 inch = 44.45 mm
Table 107 Dimensions and weight of the ANSI rack
Parameter Dimensions
Height (mm) 2200
Usable height (mm/SU) 2050/82
Width (mm) 600
Usable width between rack uprights (mm) 500
Depth (mm) 300
Usable depth (mm) 280
Weight of an unequipped rack (kg)
(with rear side front covers)
63
Weight of an equipped rack (kg)
(fully equipped)
200
Table 108 Dimensions and weight of the standard and hiT 7300 ETSI rack


A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
159
Technical Description (TED) Technical data
CPU Pentium IV 1.8 GHz (or equivalent)
Memory 512 MByte
Hard disk free space 100 MBytes
Monitor Color monitor 17 recommended
LAN Ethernet card, 2 x 3COM (3C982-TXM)
Operating system Windows 2000 Professional SP4 or higher, or
Windows XP Professional SP2
Additional software J2SE 5.0 (update 11)
make sure it is the default version in your system
Table 109 Minimum PC requirements


160 A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
Technical Description (TED) Abbreviations
10 Abbreviations
@CT Web-based Craft Terminal
AIS Alarm Indication Signal
ANSI American National Standards Institute
APR Address Resolution Protocol
APRM Automatic Power Reduction Mode
APS Application Program System
APSD Automatic Power Shut Down
AWG Arrayed Waveguide Grating
BDI Backward Defect Indication
BER Bit Error Rate
BOL Begin-of-Life
CARP Common Address Redundancy Protocol
CE Communaut Europenne
COPA Connector Panel
CNE Compound Network Element
CWDM Coarse Wavelength Division Multiplexing
DC Direct Current
DCF Dispersion Compensation Fiber
DCM Dispersion Compensation Module
DCN Data Communication Network
DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
DNS Domain Name Service
DSF Dispersion Shifted Fiber
DWDM Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing
EAM Electro-Absorption Modulator
EBP Earth Bonding Point
EDF Erbium Doped Fiber
EDFA Erbium Doped Fiber Amplifier
EGB Elektrostatisch gefhrdetes Bauteil
EOL End-of-Life


A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
161
Technical Description (TED) Abbreviations
EOW Engineering Order Wire
EMI Electromagnetic Interference
EN European Norm
EOCI External Open Connection Indication
ESD Electrostatically Sensitive Device
ETS European Telecommunications Standard
ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute
FBG Fiber Bragg Grating
FC Fiber Channel
FCC Federal Communications Commission
FDI Forward Defect Indication
FEC Forward Error Correction
FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array
FSS Fiber Switch Sites
FTP File Transfer Protocol
FTPS File Transfer Protocol Secure
GbE Gigabit Ethernet
GCC Generic Communication Channel
GMT Greenwich Mean Time
GUI Graphical User Interface
HTTP Hyper Text Transfer Protocol
HU Height Unit (1 HU = 1,75 in)
HW Hardware
I
2
C Inter-Integrated Circuit
ICMA Interconnect, Configuration and Mechanical Assembly manual
ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol
ID Identifier
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
IP Internet Protocol
ITMN Installation and Test Manual
JRE Java Runtime Environment
LAN Local Area Network


162 A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
Technical Description (TED) Abbreviations
LAx Line Amplifier
LCT Local Craft Terminal
LEAF Large Effective Area Fiber
LED Light Emitting Diode
LH Long Haul
LLDP Link Layer Discovery Protocol
LOM List Of Material
LOS Loss Of Signal
LSB Laser Safety Bus
LVD Low Voltage Disconnect
MAC Media Access Control
MCF Message Communication Function
MDF Medium Dispersion Fiber
MIB Managed Information Base
MLSE Maximum Likelihood Sequence Estimator
MPBC MPB communications
MSA Multi-Source Agreement
MZM Mach Zehnder Modulator
NAPT Network Address Port Translation
NCF Network Element Configuration File
NCT Network Craft Terminal
NE Network Element
NTP Network Time Protocol
OADM Optical Add-Drop Multiplexer
OAS Optical Amplifier Site
OChP Optical Channel Protection
ODU Optical channel Data Unit
OEM Original Equipment Manufacturer
OLC Optical Link Commissioning
OLR Optical Line Repeater
OMN Operating Manual
OMS Optical Multiplex Section


A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
163
Technical Description (TED) Abbreviations
ONN Optical Network Node
ONN-I Optical Network Node - Interconnect
ONN-R Optical Network Node - Reconfigurable
ONN-S Optical Network Node - Small
ONN-T Optical Network Node - Terminal
OPU Optical channel Payload Unit
OS Operating System
OSA Optical Spectrum Analyzer
OSC Optical Supervisory Channel
OSNR Optical Signal to Noise Ratio
OSS Optical Switch Site
OTH Optical Transport Hierarchy
OTN Optical Transport Network
OTS Optical Transport Section
OTU Optical Transport Unit
PC Personal Computer
PDP Power Distribution Panel
PHF Power High Failure
PLC-WSS Planar Lightwave Circuit-Wavelength Selective Switch
PM Performance Management
PMD Polarization Mode Dispersion
PMP Performance Monitoring Points
PSCF Pure Silica Core Fiber
QoS Quality of Service
S-FEC Super Forward Error Correction
RAM Random Access Memory
ROADM Reconfigurable OADM
SELV Safety Extra Low Voltage
SFP Small Form-Factor Pluggable
SLC Stratalight communications
SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol
SON Standalone Optical Node


164 A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
Technical Description (TED) Abbreviations
SPM Self Phase Modulation
SRS Stimulated Raman Scattering
SSMF Standard Single Mode Fiber
STP Spanning Tree Protocol
SU System Unit (1 SU = 25 mm)
TCA Threshold Crossed Alerts
TCM Tandem Connection Monitoring
TED Technical Description
TIF Telemetry Interface
TIM Trace Identifier Mismatch
TMN Telecommunication Management Network
TNMS Core/CDM Telecommunication Network Management System Core/Cross Domain Manager
TNMS CT Telecommunication Network Management System Craft Terminal
TP Termination Point
TSMN Troubleshooting Manual
TTI Trail Trace Identifier
TW-C TrueWave-Cable
UDCM Unidirectional Dispersion Compensation Module
UL Underwriters Laboratories
ULH Ultra Long Haul
UMN User Manual
USM User-based Security Model
UTC Universal Time Coordinated
VACM View-based Access Control Model
VLAN Virtual Local Area Network
VOA Variable Optical Attenuator
WAN Wide Area Network
WDM Wavelength Division Multiplexing
WEEE Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment
XFP 10 Gbit/s Small Form-Factor Pluggable
XPM Cross Phase Modulation


A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
165
Technical Description (TED)
Index
Symbols
@CT 103
A
Air filter 85, 87, 88
AIS 39, 41, 43
Alarm 36, 38, 64, 94
acknowledge 39
cut-OFF 97
detection 97
LEDs 94, 96
log 39
severity 38, 39, 96
type 96
APRM 27
APSD 27, 49
B
Booster amplifier 64, 65
C
Card slots 85, 92, 94
Cards
attenuator 73
booster-less 67
channel power monitor 67
controller 63, 96, 97
DCM 74
external pump 65
filter 68
line amplifier 64, 89
optical channel protection 84
plug-in 17, 93
raman pump 65
transponder 68, 76
UDCM 75
Channels 65, 68
Client interface 77, 80, 82
Commissioning 98, 100, 103, 107
Connectors 89, 92
COPA 85, 87, 88, 89
CWDM
filter pack 23, 72
patch-cord 23, 71
D
DCM 74
DCN 32, 104, 106
DWDM-SFP interface 77
E
EOW32, 34, 63, 96
Error correction 28
Ethernet
bus 31
interfaces 32, 35, 63
EVOA 74
F
Faceplate 93, 94, 96
Fan unit 85, 87
FEC 28
Fiber guides 85, 87
Filter 69, 70
Frequencies 21
FTP 33
FTPS 103, 106
G
Gain control 64
Gateway 16
function 32
I
Inline amplifier 64
Installation 98, 100
L
Laser
pump 64
safety 27, 49
tunable 80, 82
LCT 39, 103, 104
LEDs 38, 94, 96, 97
Line interface 77, 80, 82
Long Haul 21, 76, 77, 80, 82
Long single span 61
Loopback 46
LSB 27, 89


166 A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
Technical Description (TED)
M
Management
access 102
communication 63
configuration 63, 102
equipment 63, 103
fault 32, 37, 63, 102
network 32, 33
performance 37, 63, 102
security 63, 102, 105
software 63, 103
system 102, 103
Mechanical design 85
MPBC
RMH07 25, 61
N
NCF 50, 98, 101, 103
NCT 103
Network Element 48, 49, 57
Network topologies 19, 21
Nodal degree 50, 57
O
OADM architectures 18
OLR 18, 35, 48, 49
OMS 48, 50, 65
ONN 48, 50
ONN-I 18, 48, 56
ONN-R 18, 48, 56
ONN-S 18, 48, 57
ONN-T 18, 48, 55
Optical
amplifier 65, 74
channel 28, 56, 80, 82
channel protection 28
fiber 48, 68, 74, 76
link 30, 96, 100, 103
path 57
safety 27
signal 48, 76
transmission 27
OSC 30, 34, 49
OSNR 28
OTS 48
P
Passive DWDM 60
Path length 21
PDP 89, 90
Pre-amplifier 27, 64, 65
Pre-emphasis 74
Q
Q interface 97, 106
QF interface 97, 103, 106
R
Rack 85, 100
mechanical design 90
Raman
amplification 17, 49, 66
Raman pump 65
Regenerator 77
Regional 21, 76, 77, 80, 82
S
S-FEC 17, 28, 76
SFP interface 77, 82
Shelf 87, 88, 89, 100
mechanical design 85
type 85
SNMP 33, 103, 105, 106
SON 18, 48, 58
StrataLight 17, 25
Supervision 31
Supported cards 48
T
TIF 32, 63, 97
actors 36
sensors 36
TNMS Core/CDM 103, 105, 107
TNMS CT 103, 104, 106
Transmission
capacity 16
direction 32, 56
distance 25
line 27, 34
quality 37
system 16, 27
TransNet 98
Transponders loopback 46
Tunable laser 80, 82
U
UDCM tray 75
Ultra Long Haul 16, 21
User channel 32, 33, 35, 96
V
VOA 73
W
Wavelength 17, 21, 25


A42022-L5972-B051-02-7618
Issue: 2 Issue date: December 2007
167
Technical Description (TED)
Wrist strap 89
X
XFP interface 76, 80, 81